Home

tw

image

Contents

1. ccccccecceeeseeeeeeseseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeaas 62 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 63 6 1 Preparation Tor VVINING asise a hina daaich i ecae Rance dale 65 1 Ms WiN Procedures ssaa EE e ENE E N a a A 65 0 2 Cable Connecting Proced reS arire her can E TA a 66 8 21 Terminal DIOGK Wal Unit rerin E E 66 8 2 2 Terminal block for European expansion board and special adapters ccccccseeceeeeeeeeeeees 67 8 2 3 Grounding terminal of the FX3G 485 BD RJ cc ceccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeesaeeeeeeesaaeeeesaaeeeesesaeeeeesaages 68 8 2 4 Grounding terminal of the FX3U ENET ADP cccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeseaeeeeeesaeeeeesaenes 69 D0 Ground erronea O ee 70 8 4 Examples of External Wiring AC power type cccccceccceseececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeesseeeeseeeeesaeeeees 71 8 5 Examples of External Wiring DC power type cccccccccceeccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeesseeeeseeeeesaeeees 72 9 Input Wiring Procedures 73 91 Berre Staring INDUL Wiring eisena ienaa E a a a E 15 9 1 1 Smnk and SOUL CS INOUE sere sa enaa aa e aaaea e ia aaa a ior cudiadus EAEE 75 9 2 24 V DC input Sink and Source input tyPe cee ccccsseeeecseeeeeceeeeeecaeeeeesaaeceesaaueeesaaeeeesaaeseesaages 76 9 2 1 Handling Of 24 V DC Input vnc cora a Ren
2. For the function switching method refer to Subsection 10 9 2 uoneleysu i 10 4 2 Restriction of redundant use of input numbers oo The input terminals X000 to X007 can be used for high speed counters input interruption pulse catch SPD instruction ZRN instruction and DSZR instruction and general purpose inputs TF Take care not to overlap the input numbers amp 25 3 Zg Q 87 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 5 Handling of High speed Counters 10 5 Handling of High speed Counters 10 5 1 1 phase 1 count input These counters are 32 bit up count down count binary counters Examples of program 1 For C235 X010 5 r e C235 counts the number of times the input terminal X000 own coun M8238 Te switches from OFF to ON while X012 is on While X011 is on the counter resets when RST instruction X011 c RST C235 Reset is executed X012 The counters C235 to C245 switch to the down count or up 235 K5 count mode by turning on or off M8235 to M8245 Count input e C244 starts counting immediately when the input terminal X006 turns on while X012 is on The count input terminal is X000 The setting for this example is the data of the a aoe naea indirectly designated data register D1 DO er ere e C244 can be reset by X011 on the sequence For C244 X012 X001 is allocated as the external reset i
3. Bui induy SJ9 UNOD peeds ubIH FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 4 Pulse Catch M8170 to M8175 9 4 3 Examples of external wiring It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables for connection cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side 1 Examples of pulse catch M8170 wiring using X000 When another input terminal is used wire it according to the following diagrams 1 When 24 V DC service power supply is used i Fuse Class D grounding a ae 1 Fuse Class D grounding ae a 1 1 1 1 The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less 84 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 1 Outline 10 Use of High speed Counters 10 1 Outline High speed counters use input terminals X000 to X007 of the main unit for inputs and offer counting up to 60 kHz 1 phase Input terminals not used for high speed counters are available for general purpose inputs For the input specifications refer to Section 4 3 10 2 Types of Counting and Operations The main unit has built in 32 bit high speed bi directional counters 1 phase 1 count input 1 phase 2 count input and 2 phase 2 count input For some high speed counters external reset input terminals or external start input terminals start of counti
4. OFF Up counting 89 UOI ONPO U N S WEN Hed pue sounjee4 OO uononpou Np suoneoyioeds f Qi s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJS wasis uoneinByuoy uoneleysu A oo Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid a 3 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 5 Handling of High speed Counters 10 5 3 2 phase 2 count input These counters are 32 bit up count down count binary counters The operations of the output contact according to the current value are the same as those of the above mentioned 1 phase 1 count input high speed counters Examples of program 1 2 For C251 While X012 is on C251 counts the operation of the input X011 c RST terminals X000 A phase and X001 B phase through interruption X012 C251 K1234 e While X011 is turned on the counter is reset when RST instruction is executed ea e When the current value exceeds the setting YOO2 turns on and when the current value becomes lower than the setting YOO2 M8251 turns off Co e Y003 turns on down count or off up count according to the A phase B phase counting direction input input For C254 X011 Derien peii e C254 starts counting immediately when the input terminal X006 selfoceess RST C254 is turned on while X012 is on The count input terminals are ESEE E X000 A phase and X001 B phase X012 ar C254
5. S17 UONONSU gJ saoinaq jeloeds sj pow penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 4 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instruction FNC 74 BCD Instruction FNC 18 13 4 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instruction FNC 74 BCD Instruction FNC 18 13 4 1 When SEGL instruction FNC 74 is used This subsection gives examples of wiring for displaying the current value of D100 on the 4 digit 7 segment display Example of program RUN SEGL monitor Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring 7 segment display to be used for sink wiring in the case of transistor output Main unit Example FX3S 30MT ES Transistor output sink jo ja 10 circuit 2 In the case of source wiring 7 segment display to be used for source wiring in the case of transistor output Main unit Example FX3S 30MT ESS Transistor output Source jo ja 10 1 Use a 7 segment display with a latch and a built in BCD decoder 122 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 4 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instruction FNC 74 BCD Instruction FNC 18 13 4 2 When BCD instruction FNC 18 is used D This subsection gives examples of wiring for displaying the current value of D100 on the 2 digit 7 segment display Example of pro
6. 38 Shift Write FIFO FILO Control 78 f 39 Shift Read FIFO Control 79 ae 176 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers Appendix B Instruction List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number 2 FNC No Mnemonic Function FNC No Mnemonic Function External FX Device External Device 80 Serial Communication 170 GRY Decimal to Gray Code Conversion a 81 PRUN Parallel Run Octal Mode 171 GBIN Gray Code to Decimal Conversion 82 ASCI Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion 172 1 2 83 HEX ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion 173 ea o 85 VRRD Volume read 175 o z 86 VRSC Volume scale 176 oo a 87 RS2 Serial Communication 2 177 L 88 PID PID Control Loop 7 13 Floating Point Data Comparison G2 nm 110 ECMP Floating Point Compare 220 to 223 111 roe 224 Load Compare j 112 EMOV Floating Point Move 225 LD gt Load Compare S1 gt S2 mono pare SU GD 14 120 EADD Floating Point Addition 226 Load Compare lt Je 0 121 ESUB Floating Point Subtraction 227 ma z ao ere ORS 122 EMUL Floating Point Multiplication 228 Load Compare S57 T 123 EDIV Floating Point Division 5 si 229 Load Compare Z z C ao ess OBO 127 ESQR Floating Point Square Root 232 AND Compare z 22m ap E 233 AND gt AND C gt D 129 INT Floating Point to Integer Conversion AND gt Mhi Ga 5 Positioning Control 234 AND Compare Si lt 150 DSZR D
7. 6763 Input X specified by DSZR or ZRN instruction is already Input interrupt used in another instruction High speed counter C235 to C255 Pulse catch M8170 to M8175 SPD instruction 6764 Pulse output number is already used in a positioning Check to make sure the pulse output destination is not being instruction or pulse output instruction PLSY PWM etc driven by another positioning instruction When the memory cassette is used check whether it is mounted correctly 6770 Memory access error If the problem persists or if the memory cassette is not used something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative The write protect switch of the EEPROM memory cassette 6772 EEPROM memory cassette is protected against writing was set to ON when data was transferred to the EEPROM memory USB communication error M8487 D8487 Communication character error 8703 Communication data sum check error Confirm the cable connection between programming device and the PLC This error may occur when a cable is 8704 Data format error disconnected and reconnected during PLC monitoring operation When the memory cassette is used check whether it is mounted correctly 8730 Memory access error If the problem persists or if the memory cassette is not used something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Special parameter error M8489
8. FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 1 Configuration of a Whole System Restrictions in the use of the FX3G 422 BD When connecting a device such as GOT which consumes an internal 5 V DC to each of the RS 422 port built in the main unit and the FX3G 422 BD at the same time avoid continuous use of either device If both devices are used continuously their life may be shortened due to heat generation UOI ONPO U NO lt Configuration example gt RS 422 port built in main unit GT1020LBL 5 V DC type FX3G 422 BD GT1020LBL 5 V DC type Avoid continuous use of two GT1020LBL 5 V DC type units SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 6 1 2 Special adapter system configuration OO One special communication adapter and one special analog adapter can be connected e A connector conversion adapter is required to use special adapters ss O ar Q Communication Analog Connect a connector aj special adapter special adapter conversion adapter WM O 4 Q 3 D Qi s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJS e FX3U 4AD TC ADP FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U ENET ADP 1 1 When using the FX3U ENET ADP connect it to the last adapter position leftmost position FX3U 4AD ADP e FX3U 4DA ADP e FX3U 3A AD
9. Input response time Approx 10 ms Smk moul No voltage contact input P NPN open collector transistor Input signal form Gor eeanont No voltage contact input p PNP open collector transistor Item Input signal voltage Input circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation Input operation display LED on panel lights when photocoupler is driven e AC power type Sink input wiring Source input wiring Input circuit configuration e DC power type Sink input wiring Input impedance 2 The 24V and OV terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 30 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 4 Output Specifications 4 4 Output Specifications uononpou The output specifications for the main unit are explained below 4 4 1 Relay output specifications N Relay output specification Item FX3S 10MRLU FX3S 14MRLU FX3S 20MRL FX3S 30MRL Output connecting type Fixed terminal block M3 screw Output form Relay 30 V DC or less SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 OO Bena power Sup ey 240 V AC or less 250 V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards F O 2 Alpoint S The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value Resistance load For details on the common ter
10. Insulation resistance 500 V DC 5 MQ or more 14 1 2 Connection to peripheral device connecting connector RS 422 S58 a 2 1 When connecting a peripheral device 38 Connect and disconnect the communication cable for the peripheral device _ Qi Programming connector RS 422 suo do pue shun x3 13440 MR ES LOT 134 s uoisu p sseg KJOW N Communication N cable Positioning mark 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ S8dIAeq eloads gt 2 For continuous use of a peripheral device Such as GOT Cut off the area shown in the left figure below of the peripheral device connector cover main unit using a nipper etc and connect the peripheral device as shown in the right figure below Peripheral device connecting connector cover Connection example sj pow penuljuoosiq Communication cable Cut off the dotted line area 125 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 1 Preparation for Test Operation 14 1 3 Connection to peripheral device connecting connector USB Connect and disconnect the communication cable for the peripheral device personal computer At connection confirm the cable and connector shape Programming connect
11. FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 5 Performance Specifications Item Performance 1 phase 1 count input in both directions 32 bits up down C235 to C245 EEPROM keep 1 phase 2 count input in both High speed counter directions 32 bits up down C246 to C250 Counting from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 EEPROM keep 2 phase 2 count input in both directions 32 bits up down C251 to C255 EEPROM keep For general 16 bits DO to D127 128 points For EEPROM keep 16 bits D128 to D255 128 points For general 16 bits D256 to D2999 2744 points Data register am a 32 bits when ile register A EEPROM keep D1000 to D2999 For special 16 bits D8000 to D8511 512 points VO to V7 For index 16 bits 70 to Z7 16 points For branching of JUMP and PO to P255 256 points For CJ instructions and CALL CALL instructions ROMER Input interruption IOOLI to ISOL 6 points Timer interruption ISULI to IBIUL 3 points Nesting For master control NO to N7 For MC instructions 16 bits 32 768 to 32 767 Decimal number K 32 bits 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 16 bits 0 to FFFF H 32 bits 0 to FFFFFFFF 128 126 126 128 Real number E 32 bits 1 0x 2 to 10x27 9 0 1 0 x 2 to 1 0 x 2 Decimal point and exponential notations are possible 1 The current time of the clock is backed up by the capacitor built in the PLC Sup
12. 5 je Q O e 93 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 8 Examples of External Wiring Rotary Encoder 10 8 2 2 phase 2 input C251 to C255 The following examples of wiring apply to the cases where C251 is used When another high speed counter number is used wire the counter referring to the following diagrams It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables for connection cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side 1 NPN open collector transistor output rotary encoder Rotary encoder 2 PNP open collector transistor output rotary encoder Source wiring L aa Rotary encoder 1 The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less 94 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 9 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures 10 9 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures UOI ONPO U 10 9 1 Related devices NO 1 For switching 1 phase 1 count input counter mode to up count or down count High speed counter type High speed counter No Specifying device Down counting SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 Mionna counter Now EsSrecl fy nei devices 3 F 1 phase 1 count input OFF ON Se a 4 Q 2 For monitoring of up count down count counting direction of 1 phase 2 count input and 2 8 phase 2 c
13. Capacitive loads such as capacitors may be present in electronic circuit loads including inverters About the maximum load specifications of the resistance load refer to the specification for each model Refer to Subsection 4 1 1 130 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 5 Troubleshooting with LEDs 14 5 Troubleshooting with LEDs z When trouble occurs check the LEDs on the PLC to identify the problem with the PLC J Q 14 5 1 POW LED on flashing off 12 LED S Power of the specified voltage is being correctly One of the following problems may have occurred Check the supply voltage Power of the specified voltage and current is not After disconnecting the cables other than the power cable re 1 3 Flashing being supplied to the power supply terminal apply power to the PLC and check for changes in the state If the 2 External wiring is incorrect problem persists consult your local Mitsubishi Electric a Internal error of PLC representative amp e If the power is not off check the power supply and the power gs wn One of the following problems may have occurred supply route The power supply is off e If power is being supplied correctly consult your local Mitsubishi External wiring is incorrect Electric representative Power of the specified voltage is not being After disconnecting th
14. FUnCuOns OF PAMS ereraa E E T A T 20 ZAI ROU Me aNG ia arera E e E T 20 OAPI aso AO A a E EE E A E ee eer ee ere 22 3 Introduction of Products 23 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model NAmes cccccccecccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeesaeeeees 23 SAI MAN UNS esia a a me a aa a tear eee eee 24 312 Expansion DONIS rrearen A A E a rE aaa 25 3 1 5 GONNECION conversi n adapter a2 sa A 25 tS Pd Pec tare 0 181 r gt 1 S aa ee ee A oe EN 25 21S Memory CASSCUG sails icah tates ehicandts cateseddaluqctite merscuneaamasanoasuseeayaiane O 25 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program COMMUNICAtION ccccseeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseesaeeeeeeaees 26 22A A MOON AMM MMMM ING LO OW asda ea ar i ae A ON rasa a alg A a Mana cede viene Adal ace 2 32 2 WSOMMUMICAOM CADIS Serii crs labeled aude asl e a xls hdc sse a a Reena ee 27 3 2 9 C nverters ANCIAL TAGS t ee as aa ee ae dca ae cpa ae ac a ta 27 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units 28 Aol Generi SPECIICALIONS ssecusztsechssotascsie ne aE iR EEE coancuamcn A E Senco ER 28 4 1 1 Dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance teSt ccccececesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeees 29 4 2 Powersupply SPECICATION erona A r E 29 MZ EPG PONE YDE aiun a a cS eaaue ane 29 422 DO POWT VOE aer a a a a E EE 29 43 NDULS DECI GAlIONS aseeni a kee eek a aa Siena 30 A Oe 24 VDC Mpu SIMIK SOUTE Versieren tie ond
15. FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 3 Grounding 8 3 Grounding Ground the PLC as stated below e Perform class D grounding Grounding resistance 100 Q or less e Ground the PLC independently if possible If it cannot be grounded independently ground it jointly as shown below Other Q Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed Extension devices of PLC except expansion board and special adapter Independent grounding Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less Use ground wires thicker than AWG14 2 mm e Position the grounding point as close to the PLC as possible to decrease the length of the ground wire 70 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 4 Examples of External Wiring AC power type 8 4 Examples of External Wiring AC power type I O SL S 24 V DC service power supply of the main unit can be used as a power supply for loads 3 100 to 240 V AC Breaker Fo pg Ee ee a0 Power ON Sg a8 Q PL MC amp ons ae Dp In the case of sink input wiring MC 3 Emergency stop AS Main unit A teen nen Sa I S Q E 3 Class D grounding MC jf MC 4 4 Power supply for load D connected to PLC output 5 For details on e
16. MITSUBISHI BRRR MITSUBISHI 54 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 3 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail 1 7 3 3 Removal of main unit 3 Removal procedure S Open the terminal block cover and remove the 2 lower terminal block cover A in the right figure i on st ze a 3 o Disconnect the connecting cables including 58 expansion board and special adapters Insert the tip of a flathead screwdriver into the 4 hole of the DIN rail mounting hook B in the right A figure This step also applies for the DIN rail mounting hooks of the 3 special adapters 9 Move the flathead screwdriver as shown in the ous right figure to draw out the DIN rail mounting EE hooks of all devices 25 Remove the product from the DIN rail C in the 6 right figure 7 2 Push in the DIN rail mounting hooks D in the right figure uoneinByuoy 8 Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Bun induy CO p h SJ9 UNOD peeds ubi1H 55 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 4 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 screws 7 4 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 screws The product can
17. S17 UONONSU gJ S8dIAeq eloads gt sj pow penuljuoosiq 117 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 1 Notes about Examples of Wiring 13 1 WIRING PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not supply power to the 24V terminal 24 V DC service power supply on the main unit Doing so may cause damage to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit with a wire 2 mm or thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to Section 8 3 Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Noise resistance may be lower when the L and N wires of an AC power supply are not wired correctly Please wire using the correct polarity Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual
18. make sure to read the power supply wiring described later Refer to Chapter 8 e Indication of 24 V DC service power supply The AC power supply type has OV and 24V terminals whereas the DC power supply type shows since the DC power supply type does not have the service power supply represents vacant terminals Do not connect with vacant terminals For external wiring make sure to read the power supply wiring described later Refer to Chapter 8 e Indication of input terminal Both AC and DC power supply type have the same input terminals however the external input wiring differs from each other For external wiring make sure to read the input wiring described later Refer to Chapter 9 e Indication of output terminals connected to common terminal One common terminal covers 1 or 4 output points The output numbers Y connected to a common terminal are enclosed with heavy partition lines For transistor output Source type COMU is V 36 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 7 Terminal Layout w Introduction FX3s 10ML 4 7 2 e AC power type CG Features and Part Names u KE O N GP gt lt LL ol L ow O N 69 gt lt LL roe FX3S 10MT ESS Product Introduction DC power type Specifications ep KE H 9 X lt L
19. or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed 108 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type 12 1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type This section explains handling of relay output external wiring precautions and example of external wiring u c z 5 gt 5 D Co For the relay output specifications refer to Subsection 4 4 1 12 1 1 Product life of relay contacts For product life of relay contacts refer to Subsection 14 4 2 Bun INdnO 12 1 2 Handling of relay output a lt 1 Output terminal T One common terminal is used for 1
20. 14 2 2 Use of several running Stopping Methods cccceeecceceseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaaeeeeesasaeeeesaeas 128 14 3 Operation and Test Power ON and PLC Running ccccceccceeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeaeeees 129 120 3 ISOM GIAGMOS IC TUCO gee sics sare fect natn coerce ea tece S coe cece ae cek e AEE EAEE 129 Tha POSE TUCO S esre en a een cease snaletee E secetaeeasnesdac an 129 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 14 323 Program modification TUN CHON 2 cehed dort notte is E EE 129 14 4 Maintenance and Periodic INSPECTION cccccccsecceececeeeceueecaeeceuceceueeceeecsueesueessueeseeessueenseeeas 130 14 4 1 Periodi INSPECCION isansa a eae E a e aa 130 14 4 2 Maintenance product life of relay contacts i eccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeesaaeeeesaaeas 130 14 5 TMo bleshooting WIth LEDS danrin E E E 131 14 5 1 POW LED on flashing off 0000nn00nnnaannaannnaannnannnnannnnnnnnnnnernnenonrnonnrrrnnrernrernnrronrrrsnnrnsesnnrrnneene 131 145 2 ERR LED TOnfasSNNg On eioten a E nec E 131 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes ccccseecccceeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeesaees 132 14 6 1 Operation and check by GX Works2 cccccccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseeeeeeeaseeseeesaaeeeeeesaneeeeeeaeas 132 146 2 Representation Of errors ewer ee ee ea alee kay ei saci eee E 133 14 6 3
21. 2 Types of Counting and Operations cccccecccccssececceescecceueececcueeeesseeeesseueeeseaseesseeeeessssseessaags 85 102 1 Types AMG IMPUe SIG Mall LORAAS oe cici een oak E cas xk eb e Acn seen a a sees 85 10 2 2 High speed counter device notations cccccccssseecccsececceecectesscecsueeensecessuseesseueessegeeensueesseaess 85 10 2 3 Cautions in connecting mating device ccceecccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeauaeeeesesaees 85 10 3 List of Device Numbers and Functions ccccccccsecccceececeeecececeseeeeeceucesseueeseusessaueeseasesseeeseass 86 10 4 Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers ccccecccseececeeeeeeeecetaeeeeceeesseeeeseeeeeeaeeeeees 87 IOA TAGCO tA DE cess corse ces teatasaus a a E asda de A EE 87 10 4 2 Restriction of redundant use of input NUMDESS ccc cece ceeecceceeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeceeeeesseeeeseeseessaeeeees 87 10 5 Handling of High speed Counters ccccccsseccccssececceeececceeececceusceesseseeessaseeessausessaseeesseseeesssages 88 105 1 TO MaSe TeCOUNEINDUU cn ceca sorte A A E aus cams dee dave teaemetocaneacs 88 105 2 i phase 2 CO MVC NT UN ass 8 a A Ea ALA Saale acta ae 89 10 3 3 2 phase Z Com INGU os E A aa 90 10 6 Timing of Updating of Current Value and Comparison of Current Value cccccseeceeeeeeeeees 91 10 6 1 Timin of updating of current Value scai ee ee ee ene edad 91 10 6 2 Comparison of current v
22. 3 Removalof MAIN UNI socrii e a ba besadcieisettianac Bieta sweisee a uals 55 7 4 Procedures for Installing Directly With M4 screws cccccccseeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeesseeeeeseeeeeseeeseeseaeeeeeeas 56 1 4 1 Hole pitches for direct MOUNTING cinsin cede acd seiadescn ed ainada aaea dn aai ia ete iaaa 56 7 4 2 Example of mounting hole pitChes ccc cccccccsececeeeeeceeeeecee cesses cesses ceeseeeeeseueeessueeesseeeessneeeesaes 57 TA S InStallation OF mani Unesa ee A N ee 57 7 5 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices cccccccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeas 57 7 5 1 Connection Of extension GEVICES cccccccceccecseececceeceeaeeeeeaeeceeaeeeeeseeeeeseeeceesuecessuecessaeeessuaaeeeesaes 57 7 5 2 Connecting method A connection of expansion DOAIC ccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeas 58 7 5 3 Connecting method B connection of connector Conversion adaptel cccccceecceceseeeeeeeeeesaees 59 7 5 4 Connecting method C connection of Special Adapter ccccceccccceececeeeececeeceeceeeceseeeeesaeeeseaes 60 TO ADPICIVOM ONADES eaten me ee mean a an ae i en ene Ee 61 7 6 1 Application of Station No label FX3G 485 BD ccceccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeasaneeeeeeas 61 7 6 2 Station No Label of FX3G 485 BD RJ ccc scnsses tices osedinccsgeredeede ton thadelodtstioanceern deer aadee 61 7 6 3 Application of trimmer layout Label FX3G 8AV BD
23. Ch2 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 D 8286 Averaging time for Ch3 Averaging time for Ch3 Averaging time for Ch3 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 D 8287 Averaging time for Ch4 Averaging time for Ch4 Averaging time for Ch4 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 Model code D 8289 PT K20 Model code K10 Model code K11 Number PTW K21 174 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers Appendix B Instruction List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix B 1 Basic Instructions Appendix B Instruction List Bojeuy ul jing Appendix B 1 Basic Instructions o Mnemonic Function Mnemonic Function Contact Instruction Out Instruction LD Initial logical operation contact type NO normally open OUT Final logical operation type coil drive 1 3 LDI Initial logical operation contact type NC normally closed SET SET Bit device latch ON lt lt LDP Initial logical operation of Rising edge pulse RST RESET Bit device OFF c oQ LDF Initial logical operation of Falling trailing edge pulse PLS Rising edge pulse a S AND Serial connection of NO normally open contacts PLF Falling trailing edge pulse P ANI Serial connection of NC normally closed contacts Master Control Instruction ANDP Serial connection of Rising edge pulse MC Denotes the start of a master control block 1 4 ANDF Serial connection of Falling trailing edge pulse MCR Denotes the end of a master control block AZo OR Parallel connection of NO n
24. D8489 A Turn OFF the power and check the power supply and Special parameter setting time out error i connection of special adapters Special parameters are set improperly e Confirm troubleshooting for special adapters and set Special parameter setting error special parameters correctly e Set special parameters correctly turn OFF the power and then turn ON the power 8101 8102 Continues operation Special parameters are set but special adapters special Special parameter transfer target unconnected error blocks are not connected Check whether special adapters is connected Check that special parameters with unsupported settings are Special parameter unsupported function not set for connected special adapters 8103 8104 138 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 7 Troubleshooting 14 7 Troubleshooting z For the procedures on running and stopping the PLC refer to Section 14 2 J For the procedures on operating peripheral devices refer to the manuals for the peripheral devices amp 14 7 1 Output does not operate 12 O 1 Output does not turn on Stop the PLC and forcibly turn the inoperable output on then off with a peripheral device to check its a operation Check for troubles with external wiring 1 3 e When the output operates lt lt The output may be turned off unin
25. Default PLC type and i i J system version Version 1 00 D 8152 8 Error code for inverter M8152 FX38S Series communication ch1 aK at Inverter Communication error step piste eee f D 8153 6 number latched ch1 M8153 Memory capacity 4K steps D18703 to OIBT09 RS instruction FNC 80 and computer link ch1 RS instruction FNC 80 and computer link ch1 Communication format setting D 81204 D 81214 RS instruction FNC 80 M8122 D 8122 2 RS instruction FNC 80 Monitoring receive data points RS instruction FNC 80 ani Header lt Default STX gt j RS instruction FNC 80 DANAS Terminator lt Default ETX gt j Computer link ch1 Specification of on demand head device register D 8123 2 M8123 D 8126 D 8127 Computer link ch1 Specification of on demand data o 120 t0 D 8128 M8129 length register RS instruction FNC 80 computer D 81294 link ch1 Time out time setting O 1 Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON 2 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN 3 4 is displayed even when the memory capacity is set to 16 K steps in the parameter setting 4 Latch device Remaining points of transmit data 7 8 Default 1 DISA DENS 7 Advanced function D18160 to 01168 D 8169 Computer link ch1 f 5 Station number setting 6 Access restriction status Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON Cleared
26. ESS S FX3S 14MO 60 2 37 52 2 05 a s FX3S 14MR DS s FX3S 14MT DS 0 22 0 48 Ibs FX3S 14MT DSS FX3S 20MR ES 7 FX3S 20MT ES 0 40 0 88 Ibs FX3S 20MT ESS a FX3S 20M0O 75 2 96 67 2 64 D FX3S 20MR DS S FX3S 20MT DS 0 30 0 66 Ibs FX3S 20MT DSS FX3S 30MR ES 2AD 8 FX3S 30MT ES 2AD 0 45 0 99 Ibs spy 3z 0 FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD Eak FX3S 30MO 100 3 94 92 3 63 ys FX3S 30MR DS Ss FX3S 30MT DS 0 35 0 77 Ibs Zo ok FX3S 30MT DSS 1 Accessories 9 Dust proof protection sheet 3 Manual supplied with product 2 Installation a 35 mm 1 38 wide DIN rail or Direct installation with M4 screws Ox F T Y N O 2 35 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 7 Terminal Layout 4 7 Terminal Layout 4 7 1 The terminal layout of the main unit are explained Interpretation of terminal block layout Power supply terminals Input terminals Output terminals Vacant terminal connected to COM4 Do not use Fa Yo Y1 Y2 Y4 coma Y7 Y11 Y12 Y14 24V como com1 com2 r tL Partition 24 V DC service Common terminal Output terminals power supply 4 points common terminal FX3S 30MR ES FX3S 30MT ES e Indication of power supply terminals The AC power supply type has L and N terminals The DC power supply type has and terminals For external wiring
27. Error Code List amd ACU ON mresa aa a a eaaa aa adi 134 WE Troubleshooting serre E E E E ra ta ad caret a 139 147 1 OUPUCdOESNOLOPEralE kenta a a E ee baeee 139 14 7 2 24 V DC input does not operate ccc ceccceeccceesceecececeeuceceeeeeecsecesseaaeesseeessaeeesseaeessageeesaaes 139 14 7 3 Cautions in registering keyword snssannensnnrnnsnnrenssnrrrssrrrnssrrrrrsrrrrrsrrrrrsnrrrrsrrrensrrrersrrrerenene 140 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement 141 19 T lt lt Cl ANC A COS se e a a E 141 TS ITFA U AADAD Peen a a aa 141 TTF A AD AAD E a a N a E a A 141 TIEI FEX SUSA ADP ens e a a aai aa eaaa 142 1514 FXSUAAD P HW ADP Ai a oes ee ere 142 19 o FX UAAD FNK ADP i a a a a ch has at hb eat dacsteht nade 222 142 TT OFA VAAD T CADR n aa ea aa a a A a 143 TTA FA 3U 2 22A DP COMB rarna a a E T a eotedeiee ugha 143 VOSS ASU ASSAD PIB resets ct ans nnentng occ e a eed oraa beat 144 1521 9 EXSU ENE TAD Pep irre cochlea weal eel ast cea ac GN hk a arc E ee ae 144 152 EXPANSION BOATA iio hee paces hoe a a a eerste ee tha eee 145 192 T EXAGE X BD Seen eee Dee ee eee a ee ne eae nee een eee 145 TO 2 FA G 2EY BD ces wre atom Gaerne acti cons ee cnc Need rites N ana aden eechtadebe cs Reems 145 152 cot OS BD ea Bact alpacas a a ist leat ten eaaee a Besta a tec adeaneais 146 t24 FX SG AZ 2A BD ca reses a ce sn eres dck wee Seneca ed thse ese ieee 146 a2 KB GAD eas pe sabe
28. Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 2 Expansion Board 15 2 5 FX3G 485 BD p External Dimensions 2 Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 20 g 0 05 Ibs j e Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws 1 2 for installation of board O Side cover Label for g indication of link station number 3 Manual supplied with product 1 3 e Terminal block European type lt lt e Terminal resistance 330 9 110 Q built in ee cS Ja ala Terminal resistance ojas Alo setting switch NINII AzH SDP Se a Nw Dd 2a 5 poles 8 8 ent Q 1109 OPEN 330Q IXJ 1940 15 2 6 FX3G 485 BD RJ s uoisue External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 20g 0 05lbs e Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board p sseg KJOW N E N Side cover Label for oe oe indication of link station a number 2 types Manual supplied with sg product Sg a S es y p 35 1 38 i 10 12 e Terminal block European type Bg 0 4 0 48 for grounding EF e Connector RJ45 B e Terminal resistance 330 9 110 Q built in Terminal Layout Pin configuration Wiring setting Terminal resistance a 1 SG switch setting switch LIL n A 33 2PAIR ican 4 RDB PAIR hats C 2 poles 5 RDA om 39 6 SDB 38 8 1 7 Notused i zj 8 Not used 2 147 FX3S Series Pro
29. FNC 19 iS USEd ccccceccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeesaeeseeeseaeeeseaeeeeeeseeeeeeaaas 120 13 3 Input Matrix MTR Instruction FNC 52 cccccccccccceccecseceeeeececeeeeseeeceseeeesseeeeseeeesseeeeseeeesaeeeeeas 121 13 4 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instruction FNC 74 BCD Instruction FNC 18 122 13 4 1 When SEGL instruction FNC 74 iS used ccccccccssseeeceeeeeeeccaeeseecseeseeeeseeueeeeseaaesesseageeessaas 122 13 4 2 When BCD instruction FNC 18 iS used ce cecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeesaaaeeeesaeeeseeseaeas 123 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting 124 14 Preparation fOr TestODPEralON cns n tela a a thee aah E 125 14 1 1 Preliminary inspection power OFF cccccceeecccesseeceeeeeeseeeceseeecesseeceseeeeeseneceseeeceseueeessaagees 125 14 1 2 Connection to peripheral device connecting connector RS 422 0 0 eecccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 125 14 1 3 Connection to peripheral device connecting connector USB cccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 126 14 1 4 Writing of program and program check power ON and PLC stopped ccccecceseeeeeeee ees 126 14 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON ccccccccseececeeeceeeeeeseeeceseecesaueeeseesessaeeeeeaees 127 14 2 1 Methods of running ANd stopping ccccecceeeceeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeees 127
30. FX3s PLCs from the following version FX3S PLC version Applicable FX 30P version Ver 1 00 Ver 1 50 or later 5 2 2 In the case of programming tool version not applicable Inapplicable programming tools can be used by selecting an alternative PLC model 1 Alternative model setting Model to be programmed Model to be set Priority High gt Low FX3S PLC FX3S gt FX3G gt FX1N gt FX2N 1 1 FX2N is selected when the FX 10P E is used 2 Contents of restrictions e Programming is enabled only in the function range such as instructions device ranges and program sizes available in both the FX3s PLC and the PLC selected as the alternative model e When the FX 10P E is used the function range such as instructions device ranges and program sizes is limited to that available in both the FX3s PLC and the FX2N PLC e Use a programming tool that can select either FX3G to change parameters i e memory capacity file register capacity etc e Memory capacity must be set to 4000 steps or less e Use a programming tool that can select the FX3G model to program using the built in USB port FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability 5 2 3 Program transfer speed and programming tools 1 Built in USB communication The FX3s PLC has a built in USB communication port and performs program writi
31. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product s WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION S c oQ cF When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits D Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or accidents due to abnormal data written to the PLC under the influence of noise 1 Do not bundle the power line or shield of the analog input output cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high voltage Ja line or load line JST Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100 mm Sg D 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line a 2 Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side 5 8 However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Z Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure
32. H eH H eI 7 0 28 74 2 92 Terminal Layout Terminal resistance setting switch 5 3309 poles OPEN 1109 15 1 9 FX3U ENET ADP External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight 0 1 kg 0 22 Ibs e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws q e Accessories Manual supplied with e product e Connector 10BASE T 100BASE TX gE RJ45 e Terminal block External ground terminal M2 5 terminal block screw 81 5 3 21 Pin configuration RD Not used Not used RD Not used Not used CONDO FP WDY 144 FX3S Series Prog rammable Controllers 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 2 Expansion Board 15 2 Expansion Board 15 2 1 FX3G 4EX BD External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 20g 0 05lbs 7 e Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board N Side cover l Manual supplied with product e Connector European type Jo V 35 1 38 J Terminal Layout LEDs correspond to each input terminal C e O CJ L c DIST BXO BX1 BX2 BX3 Y 00 00 00 a0 Ld 5 poles 15 2 2 FX3G 2EYT BD External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 20g 0 05lbs gt e Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board a Side cover Manual supplied with 5 product e C
33. If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the rated voltage current and frequency of each terminal The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of
34. KO the special data register D8120 or D8400 for communication format setting Set the communication parameter PLC system 2 of the channel connecting the peripheral equipment to Not set as shown in the window below FX Parameter Memory Capacity PLC Name PLC System 1 PLC System 2 Ethernet Port O The setting contents are cleared when unchecked perate When communicate with GX Works2 GOT etc by PLC using optional board for FX etc Sia he D8120 special register of PLC must be 0 cleared and must be unchecked r Leave this unchecked Print Window Print Window Preview Default Check End Cancel 41 UOI ONPO U NO SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 OO uononpou Npald ep O D Q Q A O 7 S8DIAOQ jesoudued pue UOISI3 wasis uoneinByuoy uo ejesu i oo Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Bun induy CO p h SJ9 UN0D peeds ubiH FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability 5 2 5 Cautions on write during RUN Write during RUN program changes during RUN is available in the FX3s PLC when GX Works2 is used However list programs and SFC programs cannot be written during RUN When programming software not supporting the FX3s PLC is used write during RUN is available within the function range available in both
35. M8269 Operation and function Number M 8260 Output mode switching M 8261 Not used M 8262 Not used M 8263 Not used M 8264 Output hold mode M 8265 Not used M 8266 Not used M 8267 Not used M 8268 Not used M 8269 Not used Appendix A 3 2 Special data registers D8260 to D8269 Operation and function Number D 8260 Output data D 8261 Not used D 8262 Not used D 8263 Not used D 8264 ee orem Not used D 8265 aa orena Not used D 8266 Not used D 8267 Not used D 8268 Error status D 8269 Model code K4 Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 4 Analog special adapters M8280 to M8289 and D8280 to D8289 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 4 Analog special adapters M8280 to M8289 and D8280 to D8289 When analog special adapters are connected operations and functions are assigned to the devices shown in the tables below Devices which cannot be written are shaded in Operation and function column For details refer to the Analog Control Edition Appendix A 4 1 Special auxiliary relays M8280 to M8289 Operation and function Number M 8280 Input mode switching Ch1 M 8281 Input mode switching Ch2 ae Noted ee es M 8286 Output hold mode cancel nar O or m ee O e a w e pe a eE Operation and function M 8280 Temperature unit selection M 8281 Input sensor selection 173 Bojeuy ul jing Buum ndino NS 10 buum OO s sSN
36. Manual Hardware Edition 7 5 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 7 5 2 Connecting method A connection of expansion board This subsection explains how to connect the expansion board to the main unit Connection procedure Remove the top cover A in the right figure from the front face of the main unit Connect the expansion board to the option connector B in the right figure Fix the expansion board D in the right figure to the main unit with M3 tapping screws C in the right figure supplied as accessories of the expansion board e Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem 58 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 5 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 7 5 3 Connecting method B connection of connector conversion adapter i O This subsection explains how to connect the connector conversion adapter to the main unit z Connection procedure Remove the top cover A in the right se figure from the front face of the main unit zE 3 n 3 88 BF Connect the connector conversion adapter board to the option connector 4 B in the right figure as shown in the right g figure and fix it with M3 tapping screws C in the right figure supplied as 3 accessories of the connector conversion g adapter 5 e Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem Sos Proceed to the step 4 when using the AC power type 3S 5 main u
37. Precautions field 2 Do not connect with vacant terminal 72 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 Input Wiring Procedures DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 2 3 4 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case If an overload of the 24 V DC service power supply occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay or transistor output device t
38. UL cUL file number E95239 Models MELSEC FX3s FX3uU series manufactured FX3S MR ES FX3S MT ES FX3S x MT ESS FX3S MR DS FX3S MT DS FX3S x MT DSS Where indicates 10 14 20 30 FX3S 30MR ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD FX3S CNV ADP FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U ENET ADP FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 3A ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP Compliance with EC directive CE Marking This note does not guarantee that an entire mechanical module produced in accordance with the contents of this note will comply with the following standards Compliance to EMC directive and LVD directive of the entire mechanical module should be checked by the user manufacturer For more details please contact to the local Mitsubishi Electric sales site Requirement for Compliance with EMC directive The following products have shown compliance through direct testing of the identified standards below and design analysis through the creation of a technical construction file to the European Directive for Electromagnetic Compatibility 2004 108 EC when used as directed by the appropriate documentation Attention e This product is designed for use in industrial applications Note e Manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 2 7 3 Marunouchi Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 8310 Japan e Manufactured at Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Himeji Works 840 Chiyoda machi H
39. Unit mm inches 9 Penn g e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in 12 width or screws O e Accessories Manual supplied with g 2 product gS e Terminal block European type a 2o gE 13 E ss 23 oS wh Ja uny SOL 15 1 7 FX3u 232ADP MB sgueu zuleN O E e 4 nN O r Q External Dimensions e MASS Weight Approx 80 g 0 18 Ibs 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches O e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws Mm m e Accessories Manual supplied with z S product z T e Connector RS 232C D SUB 9 pin 16 Lo male a 5 p sseg KJOW N zo Om S5 Pin configuration O89 1 CD DCD Ef 2 RD RXD j i o 9 3 SD TXD B a o O 8 4 ER OTR gt 54 7 5 SG GND 3 4 2 2j6 6 DR DSR 5 7 Not used mn 8 Not used 9 Not used C 30 on oO n2 2 a 143 FX3S Series Prog rammable Controllers 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 1 Special Adapters 15 1 8 FX3uU 485ADP MB External Dimensions MASS Weight Approx 80 g 0 18 Ibs e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches e Accessories Label for indication of link station number Manual supplied with product e Terminal block European type e Terminal resistance 330 9 110 Q built in Oo ee T
40. a series LED are used up to two switches can be connected in series 6 Also make sure that the input current is over the input sensing level while the switches are ON Eg 3a D 3 Sy PLC T Sink input Source input a D S 3 ae 28 o E oe O O Ge eet lt 8 ox Bui induy SJ9 UNOD peeds ubIH 77 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 24 V DC input Sink and source input type 3 In the case of input device with built in parallel resistance Use a device having a parallel resistance Rp of 15 kQ or more If the resistance is less than 15 kQ connect a bleeder resistance Rb KQ obtained by the following formula as shown in the following figure Rb kQ lt RP 15 Rp Bleeder resistance Rb PEC ia Source input i Bleeder resistance Rb PEC iaiia Sink input or more Or more In the case of 2 wire proximity switch Use a two wire proximity switch whose leakage current 1 is 1 5 mA or less when the switch is off When the current is larger than 1 5 mA connect a bleeder resistance Rb KQ determined by the following formula _6 10 1 5 Rb kQ lt Bleeder resistance Bleeder resistance Rb Two wire proximity sensor Rb Two wire proximity sensor PLC Source input PEC Sink input 78 FX3S Se
41. be installed directly in the enclosure with screws 7 4 41 Hole pitches for direct mounting The product mounting hole pitches are shown below 1 Main unit A Unit mm inches 4 0 16 Model name Mounting hole pitch W FX3S 10MR ES FX3S 10MT ES FX3S 10MT ESS FX3S 10MR DS FX3S 10MT DS FX3S 10MT DSS FX3S 14MR ES FX3S 14MT ES FX3S 14MT ESS FX3S 14MR DS FX3S 14MT DS FX3S 14MT DSS FX3S 20MR ES FX3S 20MT ES FX3S 20MT ESS FX3S 20MR DS FX3S 20MT DS FX3S 20MT DSS FX3S 30MR ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD FX3S 30MR DS FX3S 30MT DS FX3S 30MT DSS 52 2 05 67 2 64 92 3 63 2 Special adapter B Unit mm inches 2 5 0 1 W Mounting hole pitch W FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 3A ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 15 1 0 6 B FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U ENET ADP 20 5 0 81 56 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 5 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 7 4 2 Example of mounting hole pitches The figure below shows an example when the FX3S 30MT ES FX3S CNV ADP and FX3U 232ADP MB are used 15 1 18 6 0 6 0 74 92 3 637 Unit mm inches Ot 1 an ie eee Ka 7 4 3 Installation of main unit Mount the special adapters and connector conversion adapter FX3S CNV ADP on the main unit be
42. directly stressed Qi s3919 jesayd d pue uolIsSJ3A wasis O O zh Q jad O UONe e SUI oo Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Bun induy CO p i uH s13 UN0N peeds 51 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 1 Installation location 7 1 Installation location Use the PLC under the environmental conditions complying with the generic specifications Section 4 1 e Keep a space of 50 mm 1 97 or more between the unit main body and another device or structure Install the unit as far away as possible from high voltage lines high voltage devices and power equipment e To prevent temperature rise do not install the PLC on a floor a ceiling or a vertical surface Install it horizontally on a wall as shown in Subsection 7 1 1 7 1 1 Installation location in enclosure 7 1 2 Space in enclosure Special adapter can be connected on the left sides of the main unit If you intend to add special adapter in the future keep necessary spaces on the left sides FX3S Series main unit FX3U 4AD ADP EN 50 mm 1 97 52 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 2 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure 7 2 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure Examine the installation location of PLC in consideration of the environmenta
43. disables interrupts the M 8057 interrupt program will not FX3G 2EYT BD Timer interrupt be processed until El FNC 7 M 81165 BYO output I7LIL disable 04 permits the interrupts aso M 8117 BY1 output ee i 3 Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON isable M 8059 4 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN 4 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP 5 Supported in Ver 1 10 or later 2 Executed at END instruction 162 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 Correspond Number and name Operation and function ing special device RS instruction FNC 80 and Computer link ch1 M18120 4 RS instruction FNC 80 instruction i S121 Send wait flag RS instruction FNC 80 instruction 1 MEG iaa Send request Dataa P RS instruction FNC 80 instruction 1 H Receive complete flag ORE RS instruction FNC 80 instruction Moles Carrier detection flag i T2 3 M 8126 Computer link ch1 Global ON Computer link ch1 mae On demand send processing Computer link ch1 D8127 Moren On demand error flag D8128 Computer link ch1 pene M 8129 On demand Word Byte changeover RS instruction FNC 80 instruction Time out check flag Positioning PLSY PLSR instruction M 8145 Y000 Pulse output stop command M 8146 Y001 Pulse output stop command Y000 Pulse ou
44. documentation for the said product All maintenance should be carried out in accordance with established safety practices c All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and coordinated manner in compliance to established safety practices The operators should also be familiar with documentation which is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment Note The term completed equipment refers to a third party constructed device which contains or uses the product associated with this manual This product has been manufactured as a general purpose part for general industries and has not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power electric power aerospace medicine or passenger movement vehicles consult with Mitsubishi Electric This product has been manufactured under strict quality control However when installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system When combining this product with other products please confirm the standard and the code or regulations with which the user should follow Moreover please confirm the compatibility of this product to the system machine and apparatus with which a user is using If in doubt at any stage duri
45. e DSZR FNC150 ZRN FNC156 PLSV FNC157 instructions with acceleration deceleration operation DRVI FNC158 and or DRVA FNC159 instructions Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instruction during execution If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block the PLC immediately stops pulse output e PLSV FNC157 instruction without acceleration deceleration operation uononpou N Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instructions during execution e PLSY FNC 50 PWM FNC 58 and or PLSR FNC 59 instructions Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instructions during execution of communication If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block the PLC may stop communication after that If the PLC stops communication set the PLC to the STOP mode once and then set it to the RUN S WEN Hed pue sounjee4 OO mode again 3 e IVCK FNC270 IVDR FNC271 IVRD FNC272 IVWR FNC273 IVMC FNC275 and ADPRW FNC276 instructions i e Instructions for falling edge pulse j When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse LDF ANDF or ORF instruction the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed without 4 regard to the ON OFF status of the target device When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse D PLF instruction
46. enabled only in the function range such as instructions device ranges and program sizes available in both the FX3S PLC and the FX1N PLC The list editor function for MELSEC FX is not available When using the list editor function for MELSEC FX upgrade the standard monitor OS communication driver and option OS to the version compatible with the FX3S PLC GOT1000 Series Applicable Check the applicability of other items in the GOT manual The following restriction applies when connected Contents of restrictions Programming is enabled only in the function range such as instructions device ranges and program sizes available in both the FX3S PLC and the FX1N PLC For applicable models refer to the GOT manual GOT F900 Series Not available For connection using the 2 port interface function refer to Section 5 5 6 Z 3 The following restriction applies when connected uoneinByuoy Contents of restrictions FX 10DM SETO Not available Programming is enabled only in the function range such as instructions device ranges and program sizes available in both the FX3S PLC and the FX1N PLC For supported models and device ranges refer to the FX 10DM USER S MANUAL Manual No JY992D86401 uononponu S WEN Hed suoneoyioads Aa jonpad Q pue sainjeay uo ejesu i oo Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Bun induy CO p i uH s13 UN09 peeds 47 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination o
47. information Chapter 5 application of programming tools System configuration Procedure for determining whether or not a system configuration is possible Chapter 6 metalation This chapter contains explanations for the panel layout and the procedures for Chapter 7 installing with DIN rail or screws This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for preparing for wiring power Power supply wiring Chapter 8 supply wiring and wiring precautions Input wiring This chapter contains explanations of the input wiring and wiring precautions Chapter 9 High speed counter This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for using the high speed counter Chapter 10 examples of programming Built in analog This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for using the built in variable Chapter 11 analog potentiometer and the built in analog input and programming examples Output wiring This chapter contains explanations for the output wiring and wiring precautions Chapter 12 Examples of wiring for each use ee explanations of the procedures for wiring input output devices Chapter 13 This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for test operation and adjustment maintenance and error check items and measures to be taken upon Chapter 14 occurrence of error Test operation adjustment maintenance and error check 2 Extension devices Chapter 15 Division Reference Eenelon proces ie eee This chapter co
48. manual for each purpose of use as S Main unit Built in functions g e Sequence instructions User s Manual Hardware Edition i 3 e High speed counter JY997D48601 Model FX3S HW E e PID instruction Details of hardware including 3 Positioning instructions FX3S input output specifications wiring ms Built in analog separate installation and maintenance of PLC 22 manual main unit a Sa 5 Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction JY997D16601 Model FX P3 E 4 NEMON GA SEU Details of sequence program a FXSSIFXSGIFX3GC including basic and applied g PEE instructions and various devices separate manual l Sy The manuals for FX3S Series will be o available in or after May 2013 a Structured Programming Manual Qi For details on structured programming FX refer to the following manual separate MELSEC QIL F Structured manual Programming Manual Fundamentals SH 080782 Model Q FX KP KI E FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common JY997D26001 Model FX KP DK E FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Basic amp Applied instruction JY997D34701 Model FX KP SM E FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Application Functions JY997D34801 Model FX KP OK E e Analog e Communication S8DIAOQ jesouduad pue UOISJ3 wasis uoneinByuo4y User s Manual Data Communication Edition JY997D16901 Model FX U COMMU E Details of N N Network parallel link computer
49. monitor device monitor program reading writing etc in the FX3s PLC using the built in USB programming port and GX Works2 5 3 1 Installation of USB driver It is necessary to install the USB driver to execute USB communication using the built in USB programming port For the USB driver installation method and procedure refer to the following manual Refer to the GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common 5 3 2 Setting in GX Works2 1 Double click the Connection Destination view gt Connection Destination Connection target data name in the Navigation window of GX Works2 The Transfer Setup Connection is displayed 2 Double click Serial USB of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial Setting 3 Select USB Transfer Setup Connection1 PC side I F CCIE Cont CC Link NET 10 H Board NET II PLC Board Board al gt GOT CCIE Field Head Module Master Local Module CC Link Ethernet Module Module EE PLC Mode FXCPU PC side I F Serial Setting RS 232C include FX USB AW FX3U USB BD Cancel C USB Eel Setup COM Port COM 1 Time Out Sec 5 Transmission Speed 115 2Kbps CCIE Cont CCIE Field Ethernet CC Link 7 NET 10 H ystem Image il a DES TEL FXCPU OK CCIE Cont CCIE Field Ethernet CC Link C24 NET 10 H Cancel Accessing Host Station Select USB 4 Click the O
50. noise from switch chattering or contact bounce e The input filter of an input terminal for a high speed counter in the main unit is automatically set to 10 us X000 X001 or 50 us X002 to X007 Accordingly it is not necessary to use special data register D8020 input filter adjustment The input filter for input relays not being used for high speed counters remains at 10 ms initial value e The input terminals X000 to X007 can be used for high speed counters input interruption pulse catch SPD instruction ZRN instruction and DSZR instruction and general purpose inputs Take care not to overlap the input numbers e Make sure that the signal speed for high speed counters does not exceed the response frequency described above If an input signal exceeds the response frequency a WDT error may occur or the communication functions such as a parallel link may malfunction e The response frequency changes depending on the number of used counters but the input filter value is fixed to 10 us X000 X001 or 50 us X002 to X007 Note that noise above the response frequency may be counted depending on the filter value of the used input FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of Built in Analog User s Manual Hardware Edition Bojeuy ul yIng 11 Use of Built in Analog O WIRING PRECAUTIONS WARNING z e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work amp
51. of the timer T1 The setting range in this example using T1 100 ms timer is from O to 255 sec Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny SOL _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ 1940 s uoisue p sseg KJOW N 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ saoinaq jeloeds sj pow penuljuoosiq 99 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 3 Built in analog input function 11 3 1 Outline of functions The main unit has two built in analog voltage inputs shown in the figure below A D conversion data will be automatically written to special data registers of the PLC Analog input enlarged view eo L A xi X17 Vv EEF D X16 QRBRB MITSUBISHI BERETA IO Ca V1 RUN ro Cpe mea ERRO STOP V C FX3s 30M MELSEG FXas 3383 i Leto E 11 3 2 Applicable PLC The following models have built in analog inputs Applicable PLC FX3S 30MR ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD 11 3 3 Analog input performance specifications Item Analog input range Absolute maximum input Digital output Device allocation Resolution Total accuracy A D conversion time Input characteristics Insulation method Occupied points Input specification 0 to 10 V DC Input resistance 115 7 KQ 0 5 V 15 V 10 bits binary D8
52. operation in such a case 4 Note that when an error occurs in a relay or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions e Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure Use the product within the generic environment specifications described in Section 4 1 of this manual Never use the product in areas with excessive dust oily smoke conductive dusts corrosive gas salt air Cl2 H2S SO2 or NO2 flammable gas vibration or impacts or expose it to high temperature condensation or rain and wind If the product is used in such conditions electric shock fire malfunctions deterioration or damage may occur Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly Doing so may cause device failures or malfunctions Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws Install the product on a flat surface If the mounting surface is rough undue force will be applied
53. or 4 relay output points Ta The common terminal blocks can drive loads of different circuit D Main unit voltage systems for example 100 V AC and 24 V DC Aa Buooys jqnosj soueu zuleN uny SOL Qi suo do pue sun XZ 194 O 2 External power supply Use an external power supply of 30 V DC or less or 240 V AC or less for loads s uoisue 3 Circuit insulation The PLC internal circuit and external load circuits are electrically insulated between the output relay coil and contact The common terminal blocks are separated from one another p sseg KJOW N 4 Display of operation When power is applied to the output relay coil the LED is lit and the output contact is turned on 5 Response time The response time of the output relay from when the power is applied to the coil until the output contact is turned on and from when the coil is shut off until the output contact is turned off is approx 10 ms 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ saoinaq jeloeds 6 Output current At a circuit voltage of 240 V AC or less a resistance load of 2 A per point or an inductive load of 80 VA or less 100 V AC or 200 V AC can be driven For the life of the contact for switching an inductive load refer to Subsection 14 4 2 When an inductive load is switched connect a diode for commutation or a surge absorber in parallel with this load DC circuit Diode for commutation AC circuit Surge abso
54. power type 3g D 2 aes Specification FX3S 10ML DO FX3S 14ML DO FX3S 20ML DO FX3S 30ML DO 9 Supply voltage 24V DC 3 Allowable supply voltage range 20 4 to 26 4 V DC i puowable amanea KRONET Operation can be continued upon occurrence of instantaneous power failure for 5 ms or less Si failure time Power fuse 250V1 6A Rush current 20 A max 1 ms or less 24 V DC i usiH 24 V DC service power supply z SiT 2 There power consumption values are maximum values which include consumption of all expansion 2 equipment and input current 5 or 7 mA per point a 29 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 3 Input Specifications 4 3 Input Specifications The input specifications for the main unit are explained below For the specifications of the built in analog input refer to Chapter 11 4 3 1 24V DC Input sink source For details on sink input and source input refer to Subsection 9 1 1 Specification FX3S 10MO FX3S 14M0 FX3S 20MO FX3S 30MO Number of input points 12 points 16 points Input connecting type Fixed terminal block M3 screw Input form Sink Source AC power type 24 V DC 10 DC power type 20 4 to 26 4 V DC l X000 to X007 3 3 KQ Input impedance Input signal X000 to X007 7 mA 24 V DC E OED ie EAG ON input X000 to X007 4 5 mA or more OFF input sensitivity current 1 5 mA or less
55. ssssiccisdecieeecascccetistcnsdensenceeie avis tncntedansdsavesctuniveandsaeeaiacdedndennsanveeiys 1 Standards 9 Certification Or ULe GUL Stand ands eeso a a asietnes iets athe ieee S eer edasean aes 9 Compliance with EC directive CE Marking ccccccssseecceeeeeeeceeseeeceeseeeseeseeessegeeessegeeessneeesseseeeesas 9 Requirement for Compliance with EMC directive ccccccccseccccsececeeceeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeseueeesseesetsneeeesnaeess 9 Requirement for Compliance with LVD directive cccccccccccesecceceeeeeceeceeceeeceeseeceeseeeeesseeeesseeeeeseeeeees 10 Caution for compliance with EC Directive cccccccccsecceceesceceeeeeeaeeceseeeeesaueeeseeeeeesseeeessaeeeesaaeeessaaaees 11 1 Introduction 12 Tate MINEOGUCTIONFO Manuals scesa na a a dota ancdeuedian des cdincdeeudimchneaanw s 12 1 1 1 Classification of major components in this MANUA ccccceccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeesaaeeeeeeaeeseeesaenes 12 1 1 2 Manual organization and position of this manual ecccceseeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeessaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeanes 13 VRS Listor manual S 41 saisa theses dese teacsti a ne Rares bach a eee Anche eco aes 14 1 2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals cccceccccneeeeceeeeeaeeeeceeeesaeeeeseeeeeaeneenees 17 2 Features and Part Names 18 2 Maor WS UN SS ett alae tetera arch aate et afc de tok bcs Seatac a ae isla atic tata tae ot ehseaghstanaetes 18 2 2 Names and
56. step Present scan time in units of 0 1 ms D 801 1 Minimum value of scan time Minimum scan time in units of 0 1 ms D 8012 Maximum value of scan time Maximum scan time in units of 0 1 ms D 8013 0 to 59 seconds i Second data for real time clock D 8014 0 to 59 minutes i Minute data for real time clock D 8015 0 to 23 hours Hour data for real time clock D 8016 1 to 31 days i Day data for real time clock D 8017 1 to 12 months Month data for real time clock D 8018 2 digits of year data 0 to 99 i Year data for real time clock D 8019 O Sunday to 6 Saturday Day of the week dala for real time clock 1 4 is displayed even when the memory capacity is set to 16 K steps in the parameter setting 2 D8003 becomes the undermentioned content Present Dane Type of memory Protect switch 02H EEPROM memory cassette OFF OAH EEPROM memory cassette ON 10H Built in memory in PLC 3 Indicated value includes waiting time of constant scan operation when M8039 is activated Number and name Input filter D 8020 Input filter adjustment D 8021 to D 8027 Index register Z0 and VO D 8028 D 8029 Analog volume and constant scan D 8030 D 8031 D 8032 to D 8038 D 8039 Constant scan duration Stepladder D 8040 6 ON state number 1 D 8041 8 ON state number 2 D 8042 8 ON state number 3 D 8043 6 ON state number 4
57. supplied only with the hardware manual For the details of the hardware of FX3s Series refer to this manual For instructions for programming and hardware information on special function devices refer to the relevant manuals Indispensable manuals v Manuals necessary for some purposes A Manuals with separate volumes for details Manual Manual Name Contents Number Manuals for PLC main unit E FX3S PLC main unit Extractions of descriptions of input output specifications upped wiring and installation of FX3S Series PLC main unit from with FX3S Series Hardware Manual JY997D48301 FX3S Series User s Manual Hardware Edition product For the detailed explanation refer to this manual Supplied Extractions of descriptions of input output specifications sn FX3S 30MCO ED 2AD 3997051701 Witing and installation of FX3S 30MCVEL 2AD PLC main Hardware Manual unit from FX3S Series User s Manual Hardware Edition product For the detailed explanation refer to this manual as Details of hardware of FX3S Series PLC main unit Additional FX3S Series User s Manual an ae os A JY997D48601 including input output specifications wiring installation O9R535 Manual Hardware Edition this manual and maintenance E Programming Additional FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Details of sequence programming for FX3S Series Series Programming Manual JY997D16601 including explanation for basic instructions applied 09
58. that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed _ Qi suodo pue sun XZ 1940 s uoisue p sseg KJOW N 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ S8dIAeq eloads gt sj pow penuljuoosiq 97 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of Built in Analog User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 1 Outline 11 1 Outline This section explains handling of the built in variable analog potentiometer and built in analog input For the built in variable analog potentiometer function refer to Section 11 2 For the built in analog input function refer to Section 11 3 11 2 Built in variable analog potentiometer function 11 2 1 Outline of functions The main unit has two built in variable analog potentiometers function shown in the figure below The value increases from 0 to 255 when the variable analog potentiometer is turned clockwise and will be automatically written to a special data register of the PLC Variable analog potentiometer 240 S S S S x1 L N S S XO vV MITSUBISHI FX3s 30M OUT MELSEG 3388 FXas 8388 5 4567 oO onee eo 2 0000 oa 14 15 00
59. the Connection Destination view gt Connection Destination Connection target data name in the Navigation window of GX Worksz2 The Transfer Setup Connection is displayed 2 Double click Serial USB of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial Setting 3 Select RS 232C in setting shown below and set COM port and Transmission Speed Transfer Setup Connection1 PC side F a CCIE Cont CC Link Ethernet CCIE Field Q Series NET II FE NET 10 H Board Board Board Bus Board Board Board PLC side F I CC Link Ethernet C24 GOT CCIE Field Head Module Module Module Master Local Module KDO PLC Mode FXCPU PC side I F Serial Setting RS 232C Other Station E include FX USB AW FXSU USB BD Cancel Connection Channel List Setting st C USB Setup PLC Direct Coupled Setting COM Port COM 1 v BE ae Connection Test Time Out Sec 5 Transmission Speed 115 2Kbps v Network PLC Type Communication lt Route CCIE Cont CCIE Field Ethernet CC Link 7 i NET 10 H ystem Image x gt Bea TEL FXCPU Co existence OK Route CCIE Cont CCIE Field Ethernet CC Link 24 NET 10 H Cancel sel Accessing Host Station 4 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 5 Select FXCPU via GOT direct coupled transparent mode in setting shown below and put a check mark to the check box via GOT F900 transparent mode PLC si
60. the memory cassette When the memory cassette is not used together is used together 7 6 2 Station No Label of FX3G 485 BD RJ The station No label is packed together with the FX3c 485 BD RJ Place it in a position where it can be seen easily for simple reference as shown in the figure below YY IRRBINIL Network Station No JY818D63001A MITSUBISHI Station 6 S 6 Station 8 s 8 EE Non Station 9 9 FEN eed RS 485 when the memory cassette when the memory cassette is not used together is used together 61 UOI ONPO U NO SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 OO uononpou ONpold suojeoyioeds Aa Qi s3919 jesaydi d pue uolIsSJ3A wasis uoneinByuoy Bui Aj ddns Jemod U Be D O D o 5 o 2a D Z r Co h SJ9 UN0D peeds ubiH FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 6 Application of labels 7 6 3 Application of trimmer layout Label FX3G 8AV BD The trimmer layout label is packed together with the FX3G 8AV BD Adhere it in a position where it can be seen easily for quick reference as shown in the figure below FX3G 8AV BD VOLUME LABEL Y818D63201A FX3G 8AV BD 62 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Editi
61. z 14 2 1 Methods of running and stopping a FX3S PLCs can be started or stopped by any of the following three methods 1 2 Two of the methods can be combined O The RUN STOP switch is located under the peripheral device connector cover z PP 1 Operation with built in RUN STOP switch RUNS TOPENG 3 Operate the RUN STOP switch on the front panel of the main unit to start and stop the PLC refer to the right figure T 4 3 Turn the switch to RUN and the PLC will start Turn it to STOP and the PLC will stop 29 O O lt IN cs OWO P UNO RRO 2 Running and stopping with general purpose input RUN terminal Operation with one switch RUN One of the input terminals X000 to X017 1 of the main unit can be used as a RUN input terminal by a parameter setting refer to the figure below When the specified input terminal is turned on the PLC starts When it is turned off the PLC is started or stopped depending on the state of the built in RUN STOP switch 1 X000 to X005 in FX3s 10ML X000 to X007 in FX3s 14ML and X000 to X013 in FX3s 20ML For details refer to Kinds of Parameters and Settings in Programming Manual O e 4 nN E O r Q _ Qi suodo pue sun XZ 194 O General purpose input terminal specified as RUN input by parameter S S X000 X007 xoo2 Main unit Source input Operation with two switches RUN and STOP The PLC can be started
62. 039 and D8039 mode then executes cyclic operation 1 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP 2 Executed at END instruction 161 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 Correspond Correspond Number and name Operation and function ing special Number and name Operation and function ing special device device Step ladder Error detection M 8040 While M8040 is turned ON transfer f M 8060 Transfer disable between states is disabled M 8061 PEC hardware error D8061 M 8041 1 TANS Er MONT INHA SAE IS M 8062 PLC PP communication error D8062 enabled in automatic operation Transfer start mode M 8063 3 Serial communication error 1 D8063 M 8042 Pulse output is given in response to i M 8064 D8064 Start pulse a start input D8065 4 D8069 M 8043 Set this in the last state of zero M 8065 Syntax error D8314 Zero return retumi mode F complete l D8315 M 8044 1 Set this when machine zero return f sted Zero point condition is detected M 8066 Circuit error D8314 M 8045 Disables the all output reset D8315 All output reset function when the operation mode is D8067 disable changed D8069 4 IMjg046 2 ON when M8047 is ON and either of yan 47 M 8067 Operation eller D8314 STL state ON SO to S255 is active D8315 M 8047 2 D8068 STL monitoring D8040 to D8047 are ena
63. 05 12 Output Wiring Procedures 107 12 1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type cccccceccccssseeeceeseeeceeseeeceeeeeseeaseesseseeesseseeesssseeeses 109 12 1 1 Product life of relay contacts 0 0 eee ccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeessaeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeessaeeeeeesennseeeeeesaas 109 V2 122 Handling of relay OulO Ul rts5 iach ese eats Ee een nei A 109 12 1 3 External wiring precautions ccccscccsesccecesscecesseceseuceeseuececsauseeseuececsuasessegeesseseesseseessagsensas 110 12 14 Example of extemal Wiring sasis istana a lala ois ceee Aaaa aa eva hades en 111 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink SOurce Type cccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeens 112 12 2 1 Transistor Output SINK and Source sha2esian secede ees baec be esc siein Sol nc ah aoe ais baad eases eect 112 1222 HAndlingrol transistor OULD UM nea aaa a E E a sand cces Oo 112 1223 Extemalwiing PRE CAUUOINS arreirar a a A R A aa biase 114 12 2 4 Example of external wiring i cdcckisinesignate lade ccaitced ewan actdincnioueseaesneiiaeadcaysdiaidedeandcedsecadenaeaentouedoo 115 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses 117 13 0 Notes about Examples OW INN Gareca a A AA 118 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instruction FNC 72 BIN Instruction FNC 19 eeeceesseeeeeeeeeeeenees 119 13 2 1 When DSW instruction FNC 72 iS used cccceeccccsceseeeeceeeececceeaeeeeseeseeessueusesesaeeeessaeeeesaas 119 13 2 2 When BIN instruction
64. 0MT ES S e FX3U 4AD PT ADP e FX3S 30MR ES e FX3S 30MT ES S e FX3U 4AD PTW ADP e FX3S 30MR ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ES S 2AD e FX3U 4AD PNK ADP EX3y 4AD TC ADP e FX3S 10MR DS e FX3S 10MT DS S FX3S 14MR DS e FX38 14MT DS S FX3S 20MR DS FX38 20MT DS S FX3U 232ADP MB FX3S 30MRIDS FX38 30MT DS S FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U ENET ADP 23 UOI ONPO U NO umn a D a Z oO oO 30 D w nD 2 uononpou yONpOld suoneoyioeds f Qi s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJ3 wasis uoneinByuoy uoneljeysu i Bui A ddns Jamod Bum induy Q pue uonevedaiy CO i uH s13 UN09 peeds FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names 3 1 1 Main units The main unit incorporates a CPU memory input and output terminals and power supply To establish a system at least one main unit is necessary FX3S C C M Incorporating power supply CPU memory input output Series name p ower supply Input output type Connection terminal block e R ES 2AD AC power supply 24 V DC sink source input Relay output Total number of Main unit e T ES 2AD AC power supply 24 V DC sink source input Transistor sink output input and output points e T ESS 2AD AC power supply 24 V DC sink source input Transistor source output e R
65. 1 Correspond Correspond Number and name Content of register ing special Number and name Content of register ing special device device Error detection Refer to Subsection 14 6 3 for details Positioning D 8060 D 8130 to D 8135 Not used D 8061 Error code for PLC hardware error M8061 DEE i PLSY instruction FNC 57 ower p Error code for PC PP PLSR instruction FNC 59 D 8062 aereo M8062 Accumulated total number of pulses output to YOOO ia Error code for serial communication D 8137 Upper re i D 8063 error ch1 M8063 an D 8138 to D 8139 Not used D 8064 Error code for parameter error M8064 Accumulated number of D 8065 Error code for syntax error M8065 D 8140 Lower pulses output to Y000 for D 8066 Error code for circuit error M8066 PLSY instruction FNC 57 D 8067 2 Error code for operation error M8067 D 8141 H PLSR instruction FNC D 8068 Operation error step number latched M8068 Accumulated number of X Error step number of M8065 to M8065 to D 8142 Lower pulses output to Y001 for D 8069 M8067 M8067 PLSY instruction FNC 57 Parallel link D 8143 Upper and PLSR instruction FNC D18070 Parallel link error time out check H 5 ime 500m 018744 BIAS 3 D 8071 to D 8073 p Inverter communication function Memory information D 81505 Response wait time of inverter 7 communication ch1 8100 Step number of instruction during D 8151 inverter communication ch1 M8151 0 8101 2 KEK
66. 11 Correspond Number and name Operation and function ing special device FX3U ENET ADP ch1 M18490 to M1849 M 8492 IP address storage area write request M 8493 IP address storage area write i completion M 8494 IP address storage area write error M 8495 IP address storage area clear request M 8496 IP address storage area clear completion M 8497 IP address storage area clear error M 8498 IP address change function enable flag M18400 t0 MJES T 166 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Correspond Number and name Content of register ing special device PLC status Default value is 200 ms in 1 ms steps D 8000 Writes from system ROM at power Watchdog timer N g g Value overwritten by program is valid after END or WDT instruction execution D 8001 2 3 KEK PLC type and D8101 system version Caco 1 00 F X3S Series e 2 2 K steps 4 D8102 e 4 4 K steps Stores the memory type built in D 8002 Memory capacity D 8003 EEPROM or memory cassette and Memory type the PROTECT switch ON OFF j status of the memory cassette 2 D 8004 leloleji Error number M MGOUS 8061 to 8068 When M8004 is ON 005 6 ONS Clock Accumulated instruction execution D 8010 3 time from 0
67. 2 0 co N le la e 26 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication 3 2 1 Programming tool The following programming tools support FX3s Series PLCs For more information refer to 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability Model name Description GX Works2 Version 1 492N or later of SWLIDNC GXW2 E supports the FX3S FX 30P Version 1 50 or later of FX 30P supports the FX3S 3 2 2 Communication cables Model name Description USB cable bj 3m USB A plug lt gt USB Mini B plug USB cable 4 9 10 For connection between personal computer and FX3S programming port USB RS 232C cable 3m_ D SUB 9 Pin lt gt D SUB 25 Pin F2 232CAB 1 Ki 9 10 For connection between personal computer and RS 232C RS 422 converter 3m_ D SUB 25 Pin lt gt D SUB 25 Pin F2 232CAB 9 10 For connection between personal computer and RS 232C RS 422 converter 3m_ Half pitch 14 Pin lt gt D SUB 25 Pin F2 232CAB 2 9 10 For connection between personal computer and RS 232C RS 422 converter 3m D SUB 9 Pin lt gt D SUB 9 Pin FX 232CAB 1 5 anm For connection between personal computer and RS 232C RS 422 converter FX3G 232 BD ew FX3U 232ADP MB 3m Half pitch 14 Pin lt gt D SUB 9 Pin FX 232CAB 2 5 sanm FOr connection between personal computer and RS 232C RS 422 converte
68. 2 24 V DC input Sink and source input type 9 2 4 Examples of external wiring DC power type 1 Sink input Main unit Fuse I 2 Bor 4 Main unit es eS ee ee ee Ml 3 Three wire sensor Two wire Input proximity sensor impedance ClassD grounding L a a M Three wire sensor Two wire proximity sensor Input impedance Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two wire proximity switch a bleeder resistance may be required In the case of sink input wiring short circuit the S S terminal and the terminal of the main unit In the case of source input wiring short circuit the S S terminal and the terminal of the main unit Do not connect with vacant terminal 80 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 3 Input Interruption lI0OLJ to 1500 9 3 Input Interruption 100 to 1500 The main unit is provided with an input interruption function and has 6 interruption input points Make sure that the ON duration or OFF duration of interruption input signals is 10 us or more X000 X001 or 50 us or more X002 to X005 For details on programming refer to the programming manual 9 3 1 Allocation of pointers to input numbers inp
69. 270 The digital value of CH1 is stored D8271 The digital value of CH2 is stored 10 mV 10 V 1000 1 0 100 mV for 10 V full scale when ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C 2 0 200 mV for 10 V full scale when ambient temperature is 0 C to 55 C 180 us The data will be updated at every scan time of the PLC 10209 gt 1000 Digital output 0 10V10 2V Analog input No insulation between each channel or the PLC 0 point This number is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC 100 11 Use of Built in Analog 11 3 Built in analog input function FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of Built in Analog User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 3 Built in analog input function 11 3 4 Analog input terminal block The analog inputs use a European terminal block Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment Terminate the cable ends as shown Bojeuy ul yIng below 1 Wire size 1 2 O Wire size z No of wire per terminal Solidwire Stranded wire Ferrules with plastic sleeve z 1 0 14 to 1 5 mm AWG26 to 16 0 14 to 1 0 mm AWG26 to 16 0 25 to 0 5 mm AWG24 to 20 g 2 0 14 to 0 5 mm AWG26 to 20 0 14 to 0 2 mm AWG26 to 24 4 3 2 Termination of cable end lt lt To terminate the cable treat the stranded single wire directly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve oS Tighten the terminals to a torq
70. 3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 24 V DC input Sink and source input type 3 Input sensitivity The PLC input current and input sensitivity are shown in the following table When there is a series diode or resistance at the input contact or there is a parallel resistance or leakage current at the input contact wire the terminals in accordance with the Subsection 9 2 2 Item X000 to X007 X010 to X017 AC power type 24 VDC 10 DC power type 20 4 V to 26 4 V DC Input sensitivity current Low 1 5 mA or less 9 2 2 Instructions for connecting input devices UOI ONPO U NO Input signal voltage SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 OO an 38 1 In the case of no voltage contact 53 O The input current of this PLC is 7 mA 24 V DC 5 mA 24 V DC in X010 or later Z Use input devices applicable to this minute current If no voltage contacts switches for large current are used contact failure may occur 4 Input number Input current D X000 to X007 7 mA 24 V DC 8 X010 to X017 5 mA 24 V DC 8 O lt Example gt Products of OMRON Type Model name Type Model name 5 Microswitch Models Z V and D2RV Operation switch Model A3P ov lt o DO Proximity switch Model TL Photoelectric switch Model E3S sa a 2D RES 2 In the case of input device with built in series diode a The voltage drop of the series diode should be approx 4 V or less When lead switches with
71. 4 Y001 Reverse limit i M 8404 FX3U ENET ADP unit ready 16 Y001 Zero point signal logic 4 i i a gt M8356 ee p g g i M 8406 Time setting execution S 3 a ae M18407 to MIBATO M 84114 Execute time setting IM 8358 Y001 Positioning instruction activation j Positioning M 8359 Y001 Pulse output stop command aAa a i ee M6360 to M18369 Pie Ce a l l M 8464 ZRN instruction FNC156 D8464 SS High speed counter function Y000 Clear signal device oy M 8380 to M 8387 z specification function enabled Ss M18388 Contact for high speed counter DSZR instruction FNC150 r u function change g ZRN instruction FNC156 Hig Y001 Clear signal device HORG B M 0 IM aai specification function enabled F Function changeover device for M 8302 Eo MAS C248 and C253 a z O nase Ring counter operation D8398 M 8487 USB communication error D8487 C in units of 1 ms 32 bits D8399 M 8488 M 8399 M 8489 Special parameter error D8489 3 A 0 O 1 D gt 1 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP 3 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or 5 when RS2 instruction ch1 is OFF D 2 1 ms ring counter D8399 D8398 will operate after M8398 turns ON Used when the SNTP function setting is set to Use in the time setting parameters 165 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M85
72. BD potentiometers expansion board with JY997D33701 When using refer to FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Installation Manual product Series Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction Edition E Connector conversion Supplied FX3S CNV ADP Procedures for handling the conversion function with JY997D48801 expansion adapter for connectors for connecting Installation Manual product communication and analog special adapters E Memory cassette supped FX3G EEPROM 32L Specifications and operating procedures of the memory with JY997D32401 product Installation Manual cassette 16 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 Introduction 1 2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals Abbreviation generic name PLCs FX3S Series FX3G Series FX3U Series FX3S PLCs or main units Expansion boards Special adapters Communication special adapters Analog special adapters Memory cassettes Peripheral devices Programming tool Programming software GX Works2 GX Developer Handy programming panels HPP RS 232C RS 422 converters RS 232C RS 485 converters Indicators GOT1000 Series GOT 900 Series GOT A900 Series GOT F900 Series Manuals FX3S Hardware Edition Programming manual Data Communication Edition MODBUS Serial Communication Edition Analog Control Edition Positioning Control Editi
73. C s power is turned on its self diagnostic function starts automatically If there are no problems with the hardware parameters or program the PLC will start and the RUN command refer to Section 14 2 is given RUN LED is lit If any problems are found the ERR LED flashes or lights 14 3 2 Test functions Functions of the programming tool to turn on off the PLC devices and change the current values settings are effective or ineffective depending on the PLC status as shown below v Effective A Conditionally effective Ineffective In Item stopped status si Devices used in program p Forcible ON OFF Change of current values of timers counters data Devices used in program When the program memory is the built in EEPROM When the program memory is in the memory cassette i Change of settings of timers and counters and the PROTECT switch is on When the program memory is in the memory cassette P p and the PROTECT switch is off 41 Forcible ON OFF The forcible ON OFF function is effective on the input relays X output relays Y auxiliary relays M state S timers T and counters C The forcible ON OFF function can turn on or off the devices only for one scan While the PLC is running the function is substantially effective in clearing the current values of the timers T counters C data registers D index registers Z and V and in controlling the SET RST circuit and self retaining circuit The operatio
74. C 84 5 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN Not used 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSUy gJ saoinaq jeloeds 163 Bojeuy ul jing Buum nding N 10 buum OO s sSN SNOEN Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny S L _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ 194 O s uoisue 9S 23 oe aw sj pow penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 Number and name Operation and function Counter up down counter counting direction M 8200 M 8201 M 8202 M 8203 M 8204 M 8205 M 8206 M 8207 M 8208 M 8209 M 8210 M 8211 M 8212 M 8213 M 8214 M 8215 M 8216 M 8217 M 8218 M 8219 M 8220 M 8221 M 8222 M 8223 M 8224 M 8225 M 8226 M 8227 M 8228 M 8229 M 8230 M 8231 M 8232 M 8233 M 8234 High speed counter up down counter counting direction M 8235 M 8236 M 8237 M 8238 M 8239 M 8240 M 8241 M 8242 M 8243 M 8244 M 8245 X O C211 ezn O N o C231 O When M8LILILI is ON the corresponding CLILIL is changed to down mode ON Down count operation OFF Up count operation When M8LILILI is ON the corresponding CLILIL is changed to down mode ON Down count operation OFF Up count operation Correspond ing special device on Number and name Operation and funct
75. C AUTION Do not supply power to the 24V terminal 24 V DC service power supply on the main unit Doing so may cause damage to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit with a wire 2 mm or thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to Section 8 3 Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Noise resistance may be lower when the L and N wires of an AC power supply are not wired correctly Please wire using the correct polarity Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the rated voltag
76. CAUTION won Do not supply power to the 24V terminal 24 V DC service power supply on the main unit Doing so may cause damage to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit with a wire 2 mm or thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to Section 8 3 Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Noise resistance may be lower when the L and N wires of an AC power supply are not wired correctly Please wire using the correct polarity Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or accidents due to abnormal data written to the PLC under the influence of noise 1 Do not bundle the power line or shield of the analog input output cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high v
77. CT switch setting Reading from and writing to memory cassette operations can be performed by using the programming tool MITSUBISHI Because sequence programs are written by an electronic format a special of O ROM writer and ultraviolet eraser are not required or The PROTECT switch must be turned OFF to enable writing or Tjon PROTECT q switch 16 6 2 PROTECT switch operation 1 Preparing the operation tools Set the PROTECT switch knob by using the tip of a pair of tweezers a Shape of tool tip precision screwdriver or a tool with a tip width of approx 0 8 mm 0 04 Good Do not use objects with round tips as the round tip can easily slip off the switch knob possibly resulting in an incorrect setting Tool tip Bad Switch operation procedure As shown in the figure below the switch knob can be pushed or pulled When setting the switch do not set it in an intermediate position Push direction Switch setting tool gt Switch case i Pull direction a S Switch knob gt OFF ON OFF ON 16 6 3 Precautions when setting and using the switch Leaving the switch knob at an intermediate position for an extended period can cause an equipment failure FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 7 Memory Cassette lt gt PLC EEPROM Memory Transfers by Loader Function 16 7 Memory Cass
78. D 8044 8 ON state number 5 D 8045 6 ON state number 6 D 8046 6 ON state number 7 D 8047 8 ON state number 8 D 8048 to D 8059 4 Correspond ing special device Content of register Input filter value of X000 to X017 Default 10 ms 7 Value of ZO Z register 4 Value of VO V register 4 Value of analog volume VR1 Integer from 0 to 255 Value of analog volume VR2 Integer from 0 to 255 Not used Bunoousejqno Default 0 ms in 1 ms steps Writes from system ROM at power ON Can be overwritten by program M8039 The smallest number out of active state ranging from SO to S255 is stored in D8040 and the second smallest state number is stored in D8041 Active state numbers are then sequentially stored in registers up to D8047 Max 8 points M8047 l The values of Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 are stored in D8182 to D8195 5 6 FX3s 30MU EL 2AD is not supported Executed at END instruction 167 h s sSN SNOEN Ja sgueu zuleN Buum Indno N Sopuy umng 10 buum OO uny SOL _ Qi suo do pue shun x3 JOUIO s uoisue Q fas N Nn D ja D 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSUy gJ saoinaq jeloeds Asowel sj pow penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D851
79. D8260 to D8269 172 Appendix A 3 1 Special auxiliary relays M8260 to M8269 cccccccccceeceeceeeeeseeeeeseeeeesaeeesaeeeeesanes 172 Appendix A 3 2 Special data registers D8260 to D8269 cc ceeccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeseaeeeeesaeeeeeeeaas 172 Appendix A 4 Analog special adapters M8280 to M8289 and D8280 to D8289 173 Appendix A 4 1 Special auxiliary relays M8280 to M8289 cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaas 173 Appendix A 4 2 Special data registers D8280 to D8289 cc cecccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaas 174 Appendix B Instruction List 175 Appendix B 1 BASIC INSIUCUON Si assicsesassaasidorendanedavsasiadoncazactenaheieaviadieiaetnaasdomeem essa coats 175 Appendix B 2 Step Ladder Instructions ccccccccecccececeeeceeeceeeecueeceeeceeceuseeuessueesaeeseeesaens 175 Appendix B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Numbet 00cc0ee 176 Appendix C Discontinued models 179 WY ANT AI NG os sd ood a a techie eter oedecein a tects 181 Revised Coo 0 9h Beene eo mPa a Re eo Sn Se ee ee ESE nee eh ee ese mer ee 182 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Standards Standards Certification of UL cUL standards FX3S series main units FX3s series interface adapter and FX3U series special adapters supporting UL cUL standards are as follows
80. DO D1 e C254 is reset by X011 on the sequence and it is reset immediately when X002 is turned on i The setting is D1 D0 When the current value exceeds the setting D1 DO YO04 operates and when the current value becomes lower than the M8254 setting Y004 turns off CO e Y005 turns on down count or off up count according to the B phase External start i ia input input A phase External reset Main unit A 2 phase encoder generates A phase output and B phase output between which there is a 90 phase difference The high speed counter automatically counts up or down according to the output as shown below A phase filer Lt 1 1 1 ai 4 B phase Up counting Down counting The down count up count operations of C251 to C255 can be monitored through the ON OFF operations of M8251 to M8255 ON Down counting OFF Up counting 90 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 6 Timing of Updating of Current Value and Comparison of Current Value 10 6 Timing of Updating of Current Value and Comparison of Current Value 10 6 1 Timing of updating of current value When pulses are input to an input terminal for a high speed counter the high speed counter executes up counting or down counting The current values of devices are updated when counting is input 10 6 2 Comparison of current value To compare and output the curre
81. DS DC power supply 24 V DC sink source input Relay output e T DS DC power supply 24 V DC sink source input Transistor sink output e T DSS DC power supply 24 V DC sink source input Transistor source output Number of input output points Total Number of Number of Input type Output type Connection Model name number of form points AC power supply common to 24 V DC sink and source va FX3S 14MT ESS a 24 V DC rs Transistor i Terminal block FX3S 30MR ES 2AD 24 V DC Ceana Terminal block FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD E N 24 V DC sink source Terminal block DC power supply common to 24 V DC sink and source input FX3S 10MR DS pF 10 6e f 4 24 V DC sink source Terminal block FX3S 10MT DS p10 ff 24 V DC EA Terminal block FX3S 14MR DS a 24 V DC ainkizoures Terminal block FX3S 30MT DSS EDE ST E 24 V DC sink source Terminal block anfi 24 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names 3 1 2 Expansion boards B Model name Description FX3G 4EX BD 4 points general purpose input FX3G 2EYT BD 2 points transistor output FX3G 232 BD For RS 232C communication FX3G 422 BD For RS 422 communication FX3G 485 BD For RS 485 communication European type FX3G 485 BD RJ For RS 485 communication RJ45 connector FX3G 8AV BD For 8 ch analog volume FX3G 2AD BD 2 ch voltage current input FX3G 1DA BD 1 ch voltage current o
82. Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to Section 8 3 Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Noise resistance may be lower when the L and N wires of an AC power supply are not wired correctly Please wire using the correct polarity Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the rated voltage current and frequency of each terminal The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24
83. E June 30 2008 Until June 30 2015 4 3 53 5 ae e2 wn P Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny S L _ Qi suo do pue Sun XJ 194 0 s uoisue p sseg KJOW N eta oo S al J o S D S 4 op O a9 Q v O iq lt O iq n 5 nN a zs Q ZD O ee nN r 179 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers Appendix C Discontinued models User s Manual Hardware Edition MEMO 180 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Warranty Warranty 1 Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment f
84. FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals 1 1 1 Introduction This manual explains the procedures for selecting the system components main unit specifications and procedures for installing the main unit FX3S PLCs can make various kinds of control in combination with the main unit functions and many extension devices expansion board and special adapters The detailed explanation of the sequence instructions communication control analog control and positioning control are given in separate manuals For information on manual organization refer to Subsection 1 1 2 Introduction of Manuals 1 1 1 Classification of major components in this manual 1 Main unit Chapter 1 to Chapter 14 This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for obtaining the manuals and a Chapter 1 the abbreviations Features and part names This chapter contains explanations of the product features and the names of the parts Chapter 2 Introduction of product nh contains explanations of the structures for model names extension Chapter 3 This chapter contains explanations of the specifications for power supply and input Chapter 4 Introduction of manuals Specifications output performance specifications external dimensions and terminal block layout er This chapter contains explanation for upgrading of FX3S PLCs and information for the Version
85. K button to finish the setting 44 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 4 Cautions on using FA transparent function in GOT1000 Series 5 4 Cautions on using FA transparent function in GOT1000 Series UOI ONPO U When monitoring circuits device monitor etc or reading writing programs in an FX3Gc PLC from GX Works2 using the FA transparent function by way of USB in the GOT1000 Series make sure to execute the following setting NO 1 Double click the Connection Destination view gt Connection Destination Connection target data name in the Navigation window of GX Worksz2 The Transfer Setup Connection is displayed SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 2 Double click Serial USB of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial Setting OO 3 Select USB 5 U 4 J3 lt Transfer Setup Connection1 g S ac PC side I F Se Om CCIE Cont CC Link Ethernet CCIE Field O Series NETII PLC oO NET 10 H Board Board Board Bus Board Board al gt PLC side I F CC Link Ethernet C24 GOT CCIE Field Head Module 4 Module Module Master Local Module af T PLC Mode FXCPU i RE ride Ui Serial setting PC side I F Serial Setting x o fab O 02 G include FX USB AW FX3U USB BD Paige Cancel include FX USB Aw FX3U USB BD aaa No Specification rae USB et
86. L u z Z H 9 x LL LQ Version and Peripheral Devices FX3S 10MT DSS FX3s 14ML 4 7 3 System Configuration e AC power type Na Installation o W H Jv N c gt lt LL Op Ww ma wv N c gt L LL OO Preparationand Input Wiring FX3S 14MT ESS Power Supply Wiring gt sH 8 lol ESE Q N o Q ep H GP X lt LL oO te wv H GP X lt LL High Speed q Counters FX3S 14MT DSS 37 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 7 Terminal Layout FX3s 20ML 4 7 4 e AC power type o L kK D N 32 gt lt fa ol U ma a N m gt lt fa FX3S 20MT ESS DC power type ep Q O oh N GP gt lt fa FX3S 20MR DS FX3S 20MT DSS FX3s 30ML1 4 7 5 e AC power type An analog input terminal is built into FX3S 30ML1 EO 2AD a lt D D H ot v ap gt lt LL Q lt D D x FT 09 69 gt lt LL FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD DC power type o Q S a 90 gt lt in Op Q ad S ah N 90 gt lt if FX3S 30MT DSS 38 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 1 V
87. LCs in input specifications reference Sink input type only FX1S PLCs manuals in Japanese are supplied and sink source input type FX1S PLCs manuals in English are supplied have different model names e For sink input type only FX1S PLCs the S S terminal and the 24V terminal are connected internally unlike in FX3S PLCs When replacing a sink input type only FX1s PLC with a FX3s PLC short circuit the S S and 24V terminals and use the OV terminal of the FX3s as the COM terminal of the FX1s for wiring Bui induy e Sink source input type FX1S PLCs are configured in sink or source input mode using external wiring in the same way as FX3s PLCs SJ9 UNOD peeds ubIH 75 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 24 V DC input Sink and source input type 9 2 24V DC input Sink and source input type This section explains handling of 24 V DC inputs in the main unit precautions on input device connection and external wiring examples For the input specifications refer to Section 4 3 For specifications and wiring examples of the built in analog inputs refer to Chapter 11 9 2 1 Handling of 24 V DC input 1 Input terminals Sink input When a no voltage contact or NPN open collector transistor output is connected between an input X terminal and the OV terminal and the circuit is closed the input X turns on Then the in
88. M8000 aa LSB 0w vor oo a monitor Example of wiring Jo Budi 1 In the case of sink wiring sesp SNOEN Digital switch 14 of BCD 0 1A50 V IX A AA A IK A AA A IK A A A AAAA T D diode is E MeGa T E E 2 9 Ca a _ Qi 8 Main unit Example FX3S 30MT ES suo do pue sun XZ 1940 s uoisue p sseg KJOW N 2 In the case of source wiring 0 1A50V VY VV WV VY VV WV VY VV WV VY VV WV diode is ee negeoeaty ye nr Cel a a oe Digital switch of BCD 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ saoinaq jeloeds 8 Main unit Example FX3S 30MT ES sj pow penuljuoosiq 119 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instruction FNC 72 BIN Instruction FNC 19 13 2 2 When BIN instruction FNC 19 is used Examples of wiring for capturing values from a 2 digit digital switch to the data register D102 are given below Example of program M8000 7 K2X010 D102 RU 7 air Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring Main unit Example FX3S 30MT ES 2 In the case of source wiring Main unit Example FX3S 30MT ESS 120 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 3 Input Matrix MTR Instruction FNC 52 13 3 Input Matrix MTR I
89. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS MELSEG F Main Unit AC Power Type FX3S LIMR ES FX3s OMT ES FX3S LIMT ESS FX3S 30MR ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD DC Power Type FX3S LIMR DS FX3s LIMT DS FX3S LIMT DSS Memory Cassette FX3G EEPROM 32L GHEE S2fety Precautions ED Read these precautions before use Before installation operation maintenance or inspection of this product thoroughly read through and understand this manual and all of the associated manuals Also take care to handle the module properly and safely This manual classifies the safety precautions into two categories and A CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe WARNING incr Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in medium or slight CAU Tl O N personal injury or physical damage Depending on the circumstances procedures indicated by A CAUTION may also cause severe injury It is important to follow all precautions for personal safety Store this manual in a safe place so that it can be taken out and read whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user 1 DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARNING Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause s
90. N Hed pue sounjee4 OO uononpou Np suoneoyioeds f Qi s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJS wasis CD uoneinByuo4y 8 Buin A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Bun induy CO p h SJ9 UNOD peeds ubi1H FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 3 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail 7 3 2 Installation of main unit The main unit must be installed before installing a special adapter or connector conversion adapter FX3S CNV ADP on the enclosure For the connection procedure refer to Subsection 7 5 3 and Subsection 7 5 4 Installation procedure Push out all DIN rail mounting hooks A in the m 100 240 _ s ss xi X3 x5 x7 Xi X13 X15 X17 ri l u re vac 5 I N S S XO X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14 X16 E v MITSUBISHI MELSEG FXas Fit the upper edge of the DIN rail mounting groove B in the right figure onto the DIN rail Lock the DIN rail mounting hooks C in the following figure while pressing the PLC against the DIN rail 00 240 S S S X1 x3 x5 X7 X11 X13 X15 X17 100 240 S S S Xt X3 XS X7 X11 X13 X15 X17 3 N S S xO x2 x4 X6 X10 X12 X14 X16 vac L N S S XO X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 x14 X16 v 9999 v oo0oo0o0
91. O S F O 77 S D a7 uny S L soueu zuleN Buooys jqnosj _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ JOO s uoisue p sseg KJOW N 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ S8dIAeq eloads p gt sj pow penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection 14 4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection This PLC does not incorporate consumable parts that are factors in the reduction of service life However the output relays points of contact have a limited life expectancy 14 4 1 Periodic inspection Check the following points e Check that the temperature in the panel is not abnormally increased by other heat generating bodies or direct sunlight e Check that dust or conductive dust has not entered the panel e Check for loosening of wiring and other abnormalities 14 4 2 Maintenance product life of relay contacts The product life of relay contacts varies considerably depending on the load type used Take care that loads generating reverse electromotive force or rush current may cause poor contact or deposition of contacts which may lead to considerable reduction of the contact product life 1 Inductive load Inductive loads generate large reverse electromotive force between contacts at shutdown which may cause arcing At a fixed cur
92. O D 8183 Value of V1 register E D 8208 Number of communication error at slave station No 5 1 4 D 8184 Value of Z2 register D 8209 Number of communication error at JEg D 8185 Value of V2 register slave station No 6 e5 2 i D 8186 Value of Z3 register g D 8210 Number of communication error at bs 5 D 8187 Value of V3 register slave station No 7 M8183 to 88 D 8188 Value of Z4 register D 8211 Code of communication error at M8191 a D 8189 Value of V4 register master siaton 1 5 D 8190 Value of Z5 register D 8212 Code of communication error at slave station No 1 O FQ D18191 ee eee Code of communication error at Se D 8192 Value of Z6 register D 8213 a Sp slave station No 2 ax D 8193 Value of V6 register D 8214 Code of communication error at D D 8194 Value of Z7 register slave station No 3 3 D 8195 Value of V7 register z D 8215 Code of communication error at 1 6 S D 8216 Code of communication error at op 2 slave station No 5 D gS 4 Code of communication error at Pees slave station No 6 Code of communication error at eee slave station No 7 D16219 1o D18250 Analog expansion board Refer to Appendix A 3 for details D8260 to D8269 Expansion board 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ saoinaq jeloeds Built in analog input Refer to Chapter 11 for details D 8270 Channel 1 input data D 8271 Channel 2 input data D 8272 to D 8273 Not used D 8274 Averaging time for chann
93. OG Search Zero Return 235 1 6 OZ a 237 AND Compare lt T 155 ABS Absolute Current Value Read 239 Lo a A 156 ZRN Zero Return 240 foR OR Compare B A 157 PLSV Variable Speed Pulse Output SF O 158 DRVI Drive to Increment a SR Ompa 8 159 DRVA Drive to Absolute 242 OR Compare lt Se Real Time Clock Control 243 a LB 160 TCMP RTC Data Compare 244 OR Compare GD 161 TZCP RTC Data Zone Compare 162 TADD RTC Data Addition a pale 2 163 TSUB RTC Data Subtraction 246 OR Compare gt 5 165 oe External Device Communication 166 TRD Read RTC data 270 IVCK Inverter Status Check C 167 TWR Set RTC data 271 IVDR Inverter Drive 30 168 O 272 IVRD Inverter Parameter Read a3 D gt 169 HOUR Hour Meter 273 IVWR Inverter Parameter Write i zj a 275 IVMC Inverter Multi Command 276 ADPRW MODBUS Read Write 177 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers Appendix B Instruction List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number MEMO 178 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers Appendix C Discontinued models User s Manual Hardware Edition Bojeuy ul jing Appendix C Discontinued models The table below lists the discontinued MELSEC F Series PLC models and programming tools described in 12 this manual O 5 Discontinued model Production stop date Repair acceptance period 2 FX3U 232ADP l September 30 2013 Until September 30 2020 a FX3U 485ADP FX 10P
94. Operation and function ing special device device z Positioning RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 a M18330 to M8397 Memo 4 PLSV instruction FNC157 i M18401 3 RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 1 2 M 8338 Acceleration deceleration operation M 840 Send wait flag O M 8339 anaes RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 andes g M 8340 Y000 Pulse output monitor i Send request ON BUSY OFF READY RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 a M 84033 D8403 P Y000 Clear signal output function Receive complete flag M Badi enable i RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 13 MIRAU Carrier detection fla M 83421 Y000 Zero return direction i g lt lt a7 lt s specification IM 8405 RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 i Sher M 8343 Y000 Forward limit k Data set ready DSR flag oS M 8344 Y000 Reverse limit TGE x RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 1 M 8345 Y000 DOG signal logic reverse M 8409 Time out check flag mesa poge Point signal logic MBAO to TAZ 14 reverse ae M 8401 MODBUS ti Y000 Positioning instruction M aci o P 2 2 M 8348 aeaio M 8402 MODBUS communication error D8402 28 a eo M 8349 1 Y000 Pulse output stop command M 8403 ee communication error D8403 Y001 Pul tput it we meme es SA 4 Y001 Clear signal output function M 8408 OSs z m 3 Y001 Zero return direction M 8410 z Aa a iia specification M 8411 MODBUS configuration request flag D O M 8353 Y001 Forward limit 7 FX3U ENET ADP ch1 M 835
95. P Max 1 unit e FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 5 n gmr o D ER O O0 Buin A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Bun induy CO p h SJ9 UNOD peeds ubi1H 49 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 Installation In Enclosure DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case 3 If an overload of the 24 V DC service power supply occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery
96. PLSV instruction DRVI instruction or DRVA instruction is used Overall frequency determined by condition of used instruction Response When HSCS instruction HSCR When HSCS instruction HSCR frequency instruction or HSZ instruction instruction or HSZ instruction is not used is used input C242 C243 C244 C245 2 count input oS ee Cee 10 kHz Number of positioned axes 1 x 40 kHz Number of positioned axes 1x 5 kHz 2 phase C251 30 kHz 2 count C252 C253 C253 OP ae input C254 C255 1 Number of axes used in the following positioning instructions PLSY FNC 57 PLSR FNC 59 DSZR FNC150 ZRN FNC156 PLSV FNC157 DRVI FNC158 DRVA FNC159 2 Calculation of overall frequency Obtain the overall frequency using the following expression Overall frequency gt Sum of used frequency of 1 phase counters Sum of used frequency of 2 phase counters High speed counter type 3 Example of calculation Example 1 When HSCS instruction HSCR instruction or HSZ instruction is not used and instructions related to positioning DRVI instruction YOOO and DRVA instruction Y001 are used Overall frequency 200 kHz 2 axes x 40 kHz 120 kHz lt High speed counter No gt lt Contents of use gt C235 1 phase 1 count input 50 kHz is input C236 1 phase 1 count input 50 KHz is input C237 1 phase 1 count input 10 KHz is input C253 2 phase 2 count input 5 kHz is input Total 115 k Hz lt 120 kHz Overall
97. PU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off T Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be a disabled cs External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case P 3 If an overload of the 24 V DC service power supply occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case 1 4 4 Note that when an error occurs in a relay or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off az P i i g r i For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe oZy machinery operation in such a case P ors ga Q o DESIGN PRECAUTIONS c AUTION e Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions e Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure _ Qi suondo pue sun XZ 194 O s uoisue p sseg KJOW N 0008d 0008W
98. Procedures 8 2 2 Terminal block for European expansion board and special adapters UOI ONPO U The expansion boards and special adapters of a terminal block type have terminal blocks for European 1 Applicable products Classification Model name Expansion board FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2EYT BD FX3G 485 BD FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 1DA BD FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 3A ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP NO Special adapters SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 2 Compliant electric wires and tightening torque Electric wire size Tightening stranded wire solid wire End treatment OO be 0 3 to 0 5 mm2 e Remove the coating of the stranded wire twist the core a Oneslectic wite AWG 22 to 20 wires and connect the wires directly Be e Remove the coating from the solid wire and connect the wire 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Bar terminal with insulating sleeve recommended product 0 3 to 0 5 mm Al 0 5 8WH Phoenix Contact 4 Bar terminal with AWG 22 to 20 e Caulking tool insulating sleeve Refer to the following outline CRIMPFOX 6 1 Phoenix Contact D drawing of bar terminal 9 2 CRIMPFOX 6T F 4 Phoenix Contact je 1 Old model name CRIMPFOX ZA 3 2 Old model name CRIMPFOX UD 6 Qi 3 Treatment of electric wire ends Ja Treat the ends of stranded wires and solid wires without coating or using bar terminals with insulating sleeve JE 3 Tighten the te
99. R517 mania Basic amp Applied Instruction Edition instructions and various devices Additional MELSEC AUE Programming methods specifications functions etc Structured Programming Manual SH 080782 g g i SP gt e1 13JWO06 Manual required to create structured programs Fundamentals Additional ECE Devices parameters etc provided in structured projects Structured Programming Manual JY997D26001 P i P proj 09R925 Manual of GX Works2 Device amp Common Se FX CPU l Additional Structured Programming Manual JY997D34701 Sequence instructions provided in structured projects of 09R926 Manual GX Works2 Basic amp Applied Instruction on FX CPU aa l Additional Structured Programming Manual JY997D34801 Application functions provided in structured projects of 09R927 Manual pion GX Works2 Application Functions Manuals for communication control E Common Additional FX Series User s Manual Details of N N Network parallel link computer link and es ve JY997D16901 non protocol communication RS instruction and RS2 09R715 Manual Data Communication Edition instruction FX3S FX3G F X3GC F X3U FX3UC Additional Series User s Manual Details on MODBUS serial communication in FX3S FX3G Manual MODBUS Serial Communication ee ee FX3GC FX3U FX3UC PLCs RBAG Edition E Ethernet When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed Descr
100. SNOEN Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny S L _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ 194 O s uoisue F 23 oe aw 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSUy gJ saoinaq jeloeds sj pow penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 4 Analog special adapters M8280 to M8289 and D8280 to D8289 Appendix A 4 2 Special data registers D8280 to D8289 Operation and function FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 3A ADP D 8280 Input data Ch1 Output data Ch Input data Ch1 D 8281 Input data Ch2 Output data Ch2 Input data Ch2 D 8282 Input data Ch3 Output data Ch3 Output data m Cc a C ee D 8289 Model code K1 Model code K2 Model code K50 Number Operation and function FX3U 4AD PT W ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP Ch1 temperature Ch1 temperature Ch1 temperature D 8280 measurement data measurement data measurement data Ch2 temperature Ch2 temperature Ch2 temperature D 8281 measurement data measurement data measurement data Ch3 temperature Ch3 temperature Ch3 temperature D 8282 measurement data measurement data measurement data Ch4 temperature Ch4 temperature Ch4 temperature D 8283 measurement data measurement data measurement data D 8284 Averaging time for Ch1 Averaging time for Ch1 Averaging time for Ch1 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 D 8285 Averaging time for Ch2 Averaging time for Ch2 Averaging time for
101. ailed description of wiring refer to Subsection 11 3 6 Special device check Check whether the special devices for the PLC are being used correctly e Input data Verify that the special device of the selected channel is correctly selected This special device should be selected depending on the channel e Averaging time Check that the set averaging time is within the specified range The averaging time should be set in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set averaging time is outside the specified range an error occurs e Error status Check that no error is detected in the PLC If an error is detected check the details of the error and then check the wiring and programs For a detailed description of special devices refer to Subsection 11 3 7 Program check Check the following items for the program e Check of storage devices Verify that different values are not being stored in the same device by other parts of the program Error status check If an error occurs in the PLC the corresponding bit will turn on The bit which is turned ON due to the error status is held ON until overwritten to OFF by the program or the power is cycled Bit Description bO Channel 1 over scale detection b1 Channel 2 over scale detection b2 Unused b3 Unused b4 EEPROM error b5 Averaging time setting error common ch1 and ch2 b6 to b15 Unused To solve the problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below 1 Over scale detecti
102. al expansion board S product 5 li bo ae supp Gi FX3G 485 BD Procedures for handling communication with JY997D32201 Installation Manual expansion board product SERS 09 Supp ee FX3G 485 BD RJ Procedures for handling communication Q with i JY997D51501 B Installation Manual expansion board i product Q O n Supplied FX3U 485ADP MB Procedures for handling communication with JY997D26301 i Installation Manual special adapter product li BOR Supp ES FX3U 485ADP Procedures for handling communication with JY997D13801 product Installation Manual special adapter Qi eS 5 Supplied nI FX 485PC IF Procedures for handling the RS 232C RS 485 conversion ane with JY992D81801 a Hardware Manual interface product Manuals for analog temperature control E Common 6 Additional FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Details of analog special function block FX3U 4AD Se Mangal Series User s Manual JY997D16701 FX3U 4DA FX3UC 4AD analog special adapter FX3U 09R619 ae Analog Control Edition _ ADP and analog expansion board FX3G BD 5 E Analog input and temperature input When using each product refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed and FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition 7 supplied FX3G 2AD BD Procedures for handling the 2 ch analog input expansion with JY997D33501 g i edi Installation Manual board Dn product v
103. al purpose RUN terminal are used without remote running stopping operation from the programming tool The RUN STOP status of the PLC is determined by the conditions shown in the following table Condition of built in RUN STOP switch condilion orgeneral purpose put terminal Status of PLC specified as RUN terminal by parameter OFF RUN RUN OFF STOP STOP Use either built in RUN STOP switch or the general input specified as RUN terminal When specifying the general purpose terminal as the RUN terminal always set the built in RUN STOP switch to STOP When the remote running stopping operation from the programming software is performed For this operation keep both the built in RUN STOP switch and the general purpose input RUN terminal in the STOP position If the stop command is given from the programming tool after the PLC is started by either the built in RUN STOP switch or the general purpose input RUN terminal the PLC will be restored to the running status by giving the RUN command from the programming tool This can also be accomplished by setting the built in RUN STOP switch or the general purpose input RUN terminal to STOP and then to RUN FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 3 Operation and Test Power ON and PLC Running 14 3 Operation and Test Power ON and PLC Running 14 3 1 Self diagnostic function When the PL
104. als of expansion boards special adapters Since the expansion board and the main Between terminal of expansion board except unit CPU are not insulated it is not D FX3G 4EX BD and FX3G 2EYT BD and ground Not allowed Not allowed allowed to perform the dielectric withstand 8 terminal voltage test and insulation resistance test 5 between them 5 n Between FX3G 4EX BD input terminal 24 V DC and ground terminal Between FX3G 2EYT BD output terminal Qi 5 MQ or more by transistor and ground terminal ne Oe inn 500 V DC megger UU lt Between terminal of special adapter and ground i 2a terminal e n pu n g 4 2 Power Supply Specifications The power supply specifications for the main unit are explained below 6 On 4 2 1 AC power type oS ee 3 iem Specification v O FX3S 10MU EU FX3S 14MU E0 FX3S 20MU EO FX3S 30ML EO Supply voltage 100 to 240 V AC Allowable supply voltage range 85 to 264 V AC 7 Rated frequency 50 60 Hz z wn lg Manane U EPONE Operation can be continued upon occurrence of instantaneous power failure for 10 ms or less 2 failure time Power fuse 250V1A z Rush current 15 A max 5 ms or less 100 V AC 28 A max 5 ms or less 200 V AC 24 V DC service power supply 400 mA 8 ic j vI 1 This item shows values when all 24 V DC service power supplies are used in the maximum T 3 configuration connectable to the main unit and includes the input current 5 or 7 mA per point a ae 4 2 2 DC
105. alue ccc ceecccceceececeeeeecaee cesses ceeeaeeeeeaeeeesaeecesaeeeesaeeeessueeessaaeessugeeessneees 91 10 7 Response Frequency and Overall Frequency cccccccccceceecececeeeeeseeceseeeeeseecesaueeeseesesseeeesees 92 10 8 Examples of External Wiring Rotary ENCoder ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeesuaeeeesaaeeeesaaes 93 10 8 1 l phase1 input C239 10 C 245 x nace eee a ae es ee ee eee es 93 10 8 2 2 phase 2 input C251 to C255 oo ccccccesececeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeessaesessueeesseeeessaeeeesaeees 94 10 9 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures cccceccccseeeeseeeeeaeeeeceeeesaeeeeseeeeeseneesees 95 NOLO Related COVICES fcinisaanetreces anes iarss eax E awaited wana Aue eae 95 10 9 2 Function switching switching of allocation and functions of input terminals cceeeee 96 10 10 Cautions OM USE cg c acces ores Beea esate uate we nend ee ante a ehdunenlanteo a E macaw 96 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 11 Use of Built in Analog 97 US MOQ UUE NG Sea ctetetatt cs sash ea focshe cc aaee E access cutet a afce saarce tena euen saree heat scerapacee te seances acecee 98 11 2 Built in variable analog potentiometer FUNCTION ccceccecceeeeseeeecaeeeeseeeecaeeeeseeeessaeeeseeseesaeeeeses 98 121 Oulie OF MU GUOINS session ices ce kes oenaetecnc eine selate a ea eetteienmnatae
106. an ee ee ie ee ee 76 9 2 2 Instructions for connecting input CEVICES cccccceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeesasaneeeeeeas 77 9 2 3 Examples of external wiring AC power type ccccccceeccceeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeesaeeeesaaes 79 9 2 4 Examples of external wiring DC power type cccccseccecseeceeeeeceeceeceeseeceeseeeeeseeeesseeeesseeeeaaes 80 9 3 Input Interruption IOOE 16150 occ eaitsetie beccstesnce pdedebteettic a esi eenteguene Gane 81 9 3 1 Allocation of pointers to input numbers input signal ON OFF duration cccccsseeeeeseeeeeeeees 81 9 3 2 Cautions for input interruption xcses fo seeesccaes eieceteesvedacaddcbeas decdaae ie aecdaceadsauadatecdaauenestdeedseteda eed 81 9 3 3 Exampl es of external WINING siirsin sce tndenastedenetacevendeileduxuenmeisdseatatet deatensdeieduaie vid cheeaebaed vodteeaat s 82 9 4 Pulse Catch M8170 0 MS17 5 2ic ct sscchveheaseonctstadeagainedeadsieedinetaadeaandeaearedganedeead eh cogeRdaaedcaadeiieace 83 9 4 1 Allocation of special memories to input numbers ON duration of input signals ccee 83 GAZ Camions TOM pue Cate Ni sere eres acc ace cc onsgainta E a seated Ga nee ase iegecsicaeseaes 83 94 3 Examples Of extemal WIN Gesctae sista cece sda a anes eo ede el ei es 84 10 Use of High speed Counters 85 MNO Ms SA INS aha itch testa ra tie es et ate By a ld meadlgded tunes R tt cesntneleodeseea 85 10
107. and stopped with individual RUN and STOP pushbutton switches For this operation a Sequence program using M8035 to M8037 is necessary For details refer to Operations of Special Devices in Programming Manual General purpose input terminal RUN WA specified as RUN input by parameter S S x000 x001 x002 s uoisue p sseg KJOW N 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ saoineq jeloeds RUN STOP _ General purpose input terminal specified as RUN input by parameter S S X000 X001 x002 Main unit Source input RUN STOP _ General purpose input terminal specified as RUN input by parameter nanan 3 Starting and stopping by remote control from programming tool The programming tool has a function to forcibly start and stop the PLC by remote control remote RUN STOP function However when power is reapplied the remote RUN STOP function is disabled The RUN STOP status is then determined by the RUN STOP switch or RUN terminal For details on the start and stop procedures with remote control from programming tool refer to Paragraph 2 of Subsection 14 2 2 sj pow penuljuocosiq 127 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON 14 2 2 Use of several running stopping methods 1 When the built in RUN STOP switch and the gener
108. ary to attach the connector conversion adapter before the special adapter using the method described in the preceding subsection Connection procedure Slide the special adapter connecting hooks A in the right figure of the main unit When adding a special adapter to the special adapter that has been connected to the connector conversion adapter read connector conversion adapter as special adapter This applies to the following steps Connect the special adapter B in the right figure to the connector conversion adapter as shown in the right figure Slide the special adapter connecting hooks A in the right figure of the connector conversion adapter to secure the special adapter B in the right figure 60 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 6 Application of labels 7 6 Application of labels The label is packed together with the expansion board FX3G 485 BD FX3G 485 BD RJ FX3G 8AV BD Place it in a position where it can be seen easily for simple reference 7 6 1 Application of Station No label FX3G 485 BD The station No label is packed together with the FX3G 485 BD Place it in a position where it can be seen easily for simple reference as shown in the figure below VY I RRBIAIL Network Station No JY818D63001A MITSUBISHI Station 6 s 6 MITSUBISHI Station 8 S 8 Station 9 S 9 When
109. be reset 140 FX3S Series Prog rammable Controllers 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 1 Special Adapters 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement 15 1 Special Adapters 15 1 1 FX3uU 4AD ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout MASS Weight Approx 0 1 kg 0 22 Ibs e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches e Accessories Manual supplied with product e Terminal block European type 98 3 86 mounting hole pitch 15 1 2 FX3U 4DA ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout MASS Weight Approx 0 1 kg 0 22 Ibs e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches e Accessories Manual supplied with product e Terminal block European type 98 3 86 mounting hole pitch 141 Bojeuy ul jing Buum ndino NS 10 buum OO s sN SNOEN Ja sgueu zuleN uny SOL O E e 4 nN O r Q 1x3 1940 s uoisue p sseg KJOW N 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ saoinaq jeloeds sj powu penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Prog rammable Controllers 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Man
110. bled when D8040 to M 8068 Operation error latch D8312 M8047 is ON D8047 D8313 enable 104 o MEOS m 7 Interrupt disable Parallel link Parallel link 1 iat as M 8070 4 Set M8070 when using master 000 disable alae M 805177 If an input interrupt or timer a Parallel link f input interrupt interrupt occurs while a special f M 8071 Set M8071 when using slave 1100 disable auxiliary relay for that interrupt station M8050 to M8058 is ON the M18072 Parallel link M 8052 interrupt will not operate M ON when operating i Input interrupt For example turning M8050 ON Parallel link I20L disable snag ie Hea M 8073 ON when M8070 or M8071 i M 8053 iia Pea Cane opie aes a iets setting is incorrect not processed even in an allowable program area Memory information IBSOL disabl i PTAR If an input interrupt or timer M 8101 to M 8104 Not used 4 i seks meee pecs Wile specal M 8105 ON during writing in RUN mode Input interrupt auxiliary relay for that interrupt 1400 disable M8050 to M8058 is OFF M 8106 to M 8108 Not used Input interrupt 805E a The no will be FX3G 4EX BD l accepted 5 Input interrupt b The interrupt routine will be M 8112 PADU ISOL disable processed promptly if it is M 8113 5 BX1 input M 8056 permitted by the El FNC r Timer interrupt 04 instruction However if Mj8114 BX2 input B00 disable the DI FNC 05 instruction M 81155 BX3 input F
111. block Two analog inputs are built in only FX3S 30ML1 EL 2AD These terminals are for wiring the analog inputs 3 Original product label The original product label is affixed to the right side of the product Product without the original product label is not covered by warranty 4 Nameplate The product model name control number and power supply specifications are shown For details on the manufacturer s serial number refer to Subsection 5 1 1 5 DIN rail mounting groove The unit can be installed on DIN46277 rail 35 mm 1 38 wide 22 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names 3 Introduction of Products 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names The following system configuration is classified into product groups A to E in the product introduction sections given below B Expansion boards Memory cassette Output e FX3G EEPROM 32L e FX3G 4EX BD e FX3G 2EYT BD Communication Analog e FX3G 232 BD e FX3G 2AD BD e FX3G 422 BD e FX3G 1DA BD e FX3G 485 BD Analog volume e FX3G 485 BD RJ e FX3G 8AV BD B Special adapters Connector conversion adapter A Ne input output e FX3U 4AD ADP e FX3S 10MR ES e FX3S 10MT ES S e FX3U 4DA ADP e FX3S 14MR ES e FX3S 14MT ES S e FX3U 3A ADP e FX3S 20MR ES e FX3S 2
112. cations Section 4 1 Failure to do so may cause failures in the PLC After transportation verify the operations of the PLC 124 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 1 Preparation for Test Operation 14 1 Preparation for Test Operation 5 gt D 14 1 1 Preliminary inspection power OFF amp Incorrect connection of the power supply terminal contact of the DC input wire and power supply wire or 12 short circuiting of output wires may result in serious damage O Before applying power check that the power supply and ground terminals are connected correctly and input g output devices are wired properly 3 The dielectric withstand voltage and insulation resistance test of the PLC should be measured in accordance with the following procedures 1 3 1 Remove all input output wires and power supply wires from the PLC 2 Connect a crossing wire to each of the PLC terminals power supply terminal input terminals and output terminals except the SS ground terminal For the dielectric withstand voltage test of each terminal refer to the generic specifications for the product refer to Ke Section 4 1 cs 3 Measure the dielectric withstand voltage and insulation resistance between each terminal and the ground terminal D Dielectric withstand voltage 1 5 kV AC or 500 V for 1min The terminals vary in dielectric withstand voltage
113. ccceeeeeeeeeeees 46 5 6 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability cccccccccccsecceeceeceseeeeeeeesseeeeseeeeseesessaeeeseeseesaeeees 47 5 6 1 Other peripheral equipment applicability 2 0 0 0 eccccceececceeeeeceeeeeseseeeseeeeeseeaceseeaeesseaeessaaeeesenes 47 6 Examination of System Configuration 48 6 1 Configuration Ora Whole SYSIOM escihedeierchecicateti le tetent a emetic lace enh taled evades 48 6 1 1 Expansion board connector conversion adapter memory cassette system configuration 48 6 1 2 Special adapter system CONFIQUIATION ccccsecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeessaeeeeeeeaeeeeesaaeeesasanseeeeeas 49 7 Installation In Enclosure 50 ft WAS CAMAUIOMN OCAUOWM ennenen ch Oeeasecs ered bien a a e Goan ae ea 52 7 1 1 Installation location in CNCIOSULE cccccecccseccceececeececeececeececececaueesaeecsauesseecsueessaeessesessanessaeess 52 TANEZ SPACE IMCMNCIOSUNG ses Meets ir ac cet a cede ace oges ae eee 52 7 2 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure ccccsecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseneesaeeeeseneesaeeeens 53 7 3 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rall ccccccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeas 53 7 951 Preparation for IMStalll Atl OM sxe ease ctoucca dee sesneneed donee cosesndencsadetsdccece eek os lt tedace Rcewsganeasi dessaaeeadeucecssideszaes 53 1 022 MSTAllaAllOMGr main CM resis das ce UG oo cd enc ONG aco hee oe totes A 54 79
114. cording to the following diagrams 1 When 24 V DC service power supply is used Fuse 1 1 Class D grounding Class D grounding 1 1 The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less 82 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 4 Pulse Catch M8170 to M8175 9 4 Pulse Catch M8170 to M8175 The main unit is provided with a pulse catch function and has 6 pulse catch input points For details on programming refer to the programming manual 9 4 1 Allocation of special memories to input numbers ON duration of input signals Input number Contact on sequence program ON duration of input signal X000 M8170 10 us or more X001 M8171 X002 M8172 X003 M8173 50 us or more X004 M8174 X005 M8175 9 4 2 Cautions for pulse catch 1 Non overlap of input numbers The input terminals X000 to X005 can be used for high speed counter input interruption pulse catch SPD instruction ZRN instruction DSZR instruction and general purpose inputs Take care not to overlap the input numbers 2 Cautions in wiring It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables for connection cables 83 UOI ONPO U NO SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 OO uononpou yNpold suoneoyioeds f Qi s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJS wasis CD uoneinByuoy uoneleysu A O0 Q Fp o 2 D oe O O Ge eet lt 8 ox
115. ct refer to the following Refer to Subsection 4 1 1 3 Ground the PLC independently or jointly Refer to Section 8 3 PLC Other Other Other equipment equipment equipment Q Q O o Q Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed 4 The PLC cannot be used at a pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure to avoid damage 28 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 2 Power Supply Specifications 4 1 1 Dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance test Perform dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance test at the following voltage between each terminals and the main unit ground terminal Terminal Dielectric strength Remark resistance Terminals of main unit Between power supply terminal AC power and 1 5 kV AC for 1 min ground terminal Between power supply terminal DC power and ground terminal Between input terminal 24 V DC and ground uononpou N S WEN Hed pue sounjee4 500 V AC for 1 min 5 MQ or more by terminal 500 V DC megger 3 Between output terminal relay and ground 1 5 kV AC for 1 min terminal aa og 9 Between output terminal transistor and ground 500 V AC for 1 min i S terminal Main unit analog input terminal and ground ferminal Not allowed Not allowed Termin
116. ct the power supply to the terminals L and N j In the case of DC power type 4 e Connect the power supply to the terminals 6 and O n Provide the power supply circuit with the protection circuit shown in this subsection 8 For details refer to Section 8 4 8 Wire the ground terminal at a grounding resistance of 100 or less Class D Qi o U lt Connect a class D ground wire to the terminal JE a For details refer to Section 8 3 and Section 8 4 2 3 2 Wire the input X terminals For input select sink or source input by the following connection 6 oS In the case of AC power type RE e For sink input connect the 24V and S S terminals a e For source input connect the OV and S S terminals In the case of DC power type e For sink input connect the and S S terminals e For source input connect the and S S terminals uoneleysuy i Connect sensors and switches to the terminals For details refer to Chapter 9 Wire the output Y terminals Connect loads to the terminals For details refer to Chapter 12 1 T a gt WD se D D O s13 UN09 65 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 2 Cable Connecting Procedures 8 2 Cable Connecting Procedures The cable connecting procedures are explained below 8 2 1 Terminal block Main unit The ter
117. d Communication mode Correspond Number and name Content of register ing special device RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 D 8400 eomnmunicalon tomer seta Daal 3 D18402 Remaining points ofranemit data M8402 Dje403 Monitoring receive data points M6403 Da D18406 1o DIBA D 8409 aa D 8410 RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 i Header 1 and 2 lt Default STX gt RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 DGAN E as i D 8412 RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 i Terminator 1 and 2 lt Default ETX gt E RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 29s a ARa a ine i RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 Pie Sane een i D 8416 kaa a aa FNC 87 ch1 D 8417 pisara 3 MODBUS communication ch1 Dau 3 Dam pao Dieas pr 3 ed oni re 2 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP 170 Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 Correspond Number and name Content of register ing special device 5 O FX3U ENET ADP ch1 D 8400 IP Address Low order D 8401 IP Address High order 1 2 D 8402 Subnet mask Low order D 8403 Subnet mask High order 2 D 8404 E IP address i a D 8405 AE IP address i 4 3 peas 53 D 8407 a condition of the i p0 i D8410 14 D 8412 to D 8414 E 5 piene OF 7 15 pate 7 959 pere 7 H Positioning OA Net D 8460 to D 8463 Not used z DSZR instructio
118. de 03 Interrupt Return 43 SUM Sum of Active Bits 04 Enable Interrupt 44 Check Specified Bit Status 05 DE Disable Interrupt 45 Mean 06 Main Routine Program End 46 Los 07 WDT Watchdog Timer Refresh 47 Lf 08 FOR Start a FOR NEXT Loop 48 he oe 09 End a FOR NEXT Loop 49 FLT Conversion to Floating Point Move and Compare High Speed Processing 10 Compare 50 Refresh 11 Zone Compare 51 Po 12 MOV Move 52 MTR Input Matrix 13 Shift Move 53 High Speed Counter Set 14 CML Complement 54 High Speed Counter Reset 15 Block Move 55 HSZ High Speed Counter Zone Compare 16 Fill Move 56 SPD Speed Detection 17 Los l 57 Pulse Y Output 18 Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal 58 Pulse Width Modulation 19 BIN Conversion to Binary 59 Acceleration Deceleration Setup Arithmetic and Logical Operation Handy Instruction 20 ADD Addition 60 IST Initial State 21 SUB Subtraction 61 SER Search a Data Stack 22 MUL Multiplication 62 Absolute Drum Sequencer 23 DIV Division 63 Incremental Drum Sequencer 24 Increment 64 o o 25 Decrement 65 fe 26 Logical Word AND 66 ALT Alternate State 27 WOR Logical Word OR 67 Ramp Variable Value 28 Logical Exclusive OR 68 Rotation and Shift Operation External FX I O Device 30 ROR O Rotation Right 70 oe 31 Rotation Left 71 Pe 32 fi 72 DSW Digital Switch Thumbwheel Input 34 Bit Shift Right 74 Seven Segment With Latch 35 Bit Shift Left 75 L 2 36 Word Shift Right 76 C 37 Word Shift Left 77 Le
119. de 5 is stored in the corresponding special data B register 2 The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code S Special data register Description D8279 Model code sj pow penuljuoosiq 103 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of Built in Analog User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 3 Built in analog input function 11 3 8 Program example Create the following program to read out analog conversion A D conversion data The following program will store the converted A D value of channel 1 data into D100 and that of channel 2 data into D101 Even if the input data is not stored into D100 or D101 the data registers D8270 or D8271 can be directly used as timer counter setting value or in a PID instruction fr De ee fag ee 11 3 9 Changing of input characteristics Sets the averaging time for channel 1 Sets the averaging time for channel 2 Stores the A D converted channel 1 digital data into D100 Stores the A D converted channel 2 digital data into D101 The input characteristics can be changed using a sequence program in the PLC Example Changing of input characteristics This section describes an example of a program that can change the digital output range of 100 to 500 when the voltage input is 1 to 5 V to digital output range of O to 10000 1 Input characteristics Voltage input characteristics Digital output value to be changed
120. de I F Detailed Setting of GOT PLC Module CC IE Field Ethernet Adapter Setup PLC Mod FXCPU Cancel via GOT direct coupled transparent mode vila QU emet transparent mode Select FXCPU M via GOT F900 transparent mode Select via GOT direct coupled transparent mode C C24 Put a check mark to the check box via GOT F900 transparent mode 6 Click the OK button to finish the setting 46 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 6 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability 5 6 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability uononpou 5 6 1 Other peripheral equipment applicability N Model name Applicability Remarks Standard monitor OS communication driver and option OS which support the FX3S PLC are required For details refer to the GOT manual This series is subject to the following restrictions when connected using unsupported standard monitor OS communication driver or option OS Contents of restrictions e When connected using standard monitor OS communication driver and option OS which support the FX3G PLC Programming is enabled only in the function range such as instructions device ranges and program sizes available in both the FX3S PLC and the FX3G PLC e When connected using standard monitor OS communication driver and option OS which do not support the FX3G PLC Programming is
121. e Limit of normal rotation Interlock Normal rotation Reverse rotation Limit of PLC output reverse rotation element 114 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 12 2 4 Example of external wiring 1 Transistor output Sink sy c z 5 gt 5 a Ca 100 to 240 V AC Breaker Main unit transistor output sink Buin yndino h Emergency stop 10 buum OO a re ee sesp SNOEN wh Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny S L _ Qi J Power supply for load connected to PLC output suondo pue sun XZ 194 O For details on emergency stop operation refer to DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field s uoisue p sseg KJOW N 1 The output circuit of this PLC does not have a built in fuse Provide a fuse suitable to each load to prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit board caused by output element fracture due to load short circuiting 2 e represents vacant terminals WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ saoinaq jeloeds e Do not wire the vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product sj pow penuljuoosiq 115 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 Externa
122. e current and frequency of each terminal The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed 74 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 1 Before Starting Input Wiring 9 1 Before Starting Input Wiring UOI ONPO U 9 1 1 Sink and source input NO The input terminals X of the main unit are common to sink source input of 24 V DC internal power 1 Differences between t
123. e equipment start up test run and other tasks Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible prov
124. e cables other than the power cable re supplied to the power supply terminal apply power to the PLC and check for changes in the state If the Sy The power cable is broken problem persists consult your local Mitsubishi Electric 252 representative oS a 2 gt 88 14 5 2 ERR LED on flashing off a Ln Qi welt PLC Status Action Status 1 Stop the PLC and re apply power If ERR LED goes off a watchdog timer error may have occurred Take any of the following measures Review the program The maximum value D8012 of the scan time should not exceed the setting D8000 of the watchdog timer Check that the input used for input interruption or pulse catch is not being abnormally turned on and off in one scan Check that the frequency of the pulse duty of 50 input to the high speed counter does not exceed the specified range Add the WDT instructions A watchdog timer error may have occurred Add some WDT instructions to the program and reset the watchdog On or the hardware of the PLC may be timer several times in one scan damaged Change the setting of the watchdog timer Change the watchdog timer setting D8000 in the program so that the setting is larger than the maximum value of the scan time D8012 2 Remove the PLC and supply power to it from another power supply on a desk If the ERR LED goes off noise may have affected the PLC Take the following measures Check the ground wiring and reexamine the wiring r
125. ectly depending on electrical compatibility Check the specifications in advance Voltage output type encoders and absolute encoders cannot be connected to the high speed counter input terminals Terminals for connecting Output form that can be directly connected Input terminals of main unit Open collector transistor output form applicable to 24 V DC 85 UOI ONPO U NO SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 OO uononpou Np suoneoyioeds f Qi s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJS wasis CD uoneinByuoy uoneleysu I u 2 gt ome op O O lt T iq O 3 Q r O 5 je Q O e FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 3 List of Device Numbers and Functions 10 3 List of Device Numbers and Functions For details on the high speed counter number OP refer to Subsection 10 2 2 Response Device No External reset External start a Frequency input terminal input terminal Ea C235 ooe None C236 C237 C238 None None C239 32 bit 1 phase 1 count input C240 bi directional High speed counter type Data length counter C2420 Provided None Provided Provided C248 OF a C247 32 bit 1 phase 2 count input Provided bi directional C248 counter C249 Provided Provided C250 C255 0P r C252 32 bit 2 phase 2 count input Provided None bi directional C253 counter 5 P
126. either M8061 M8062 accuton complia ees T lt M8064 M8065 M8066 or M8067 is D8004 PLC mode Error occurrence ON wee eae eee M 80317 this special auxiliary relay is Clock Non latch memory activated the ON OFF image 2 present values of T C D an D H aa ig pies oe M M 8032 2 special data registers are cleared to z j i Latch memory all 78 z clear However file registers D in E M 8012 ON and OFF in 100 ms cycle i 100 ms clock pulse ON 50 ms OFF 50 ms program memory S17 UONONSUy gJ saoinaq jeloeds M 8013 ON and OFF in 1 sec cycle f M 8033 When PLC is switched from RUN to 1 sec clock pulse ON 500 ms OFF 500 ms Memory hold STOP STOP image memory and data M 8014 ON and OFF in 1 min cycle j men ae tone 1 min clock pulse _ ON 30 sec OFF 30 sec M 80342 All external output contacts of PLC f Bers Clock stop and preset j All outputs disable are turned OFF For real time clock M 8035 l Forced RUN mode Time read display is stopped eens For real time clock i M 8036 C Refer to Programming Manual for Forced RUN signal 30 M 8017 30 seconds correction i details 22 For real time clock M 8037 oO i iai A N Forced STOP a moe raion deen wave ON sana M 8038 Communication parameter setting D8176 to M 8019 Real time clock RTC error _ Parameter setting flag for N N network setting D8180 PE M 8039 When M8039 is ON PLC waits until Constant scan scan time specified in D8
127. el 1 D 8275 Averaging time for channel 2 D 8276 to D 8277 Not used D 8278 Error status D 8279 Model code Analog special adapter Refer to Appendix A 4 for details 22 Dz A 3 1 Available only for FX3s 30MLIJ ELI 2AD 169 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Correspond Number and name Content of register ing special device Positioning D 8340 Lower Y000 Current value register D 8341 Default 0 Y000 Bias speed ais Default 0 D 8343 Y000 Maximum speed i D 8344 Default 100000 Y000 Creep speed oasis Default 1000 j D 8346 Y000 Zero return speed i D 8347 Default 50000 Y000 Acceleration time aes Default 100 j Y000 Deceleration time eo Default 100 D 8350 Y001 Current value register D 8351 Default 0 Y001 Bias speed g peas Default 0 D 8353 Y001 Maximum speed l D 8354 Default 100000 Y001 Creep speed g DGASp Default 1000 D 8356 Y001 Zero return speed i D 8357 Default 50000 Y001 Acceleration time i BAIR Default 100 Y001 Deceleration time ERR Default 100 D 8360 to D 8369 Not used Ring counter D 8398 Up operation ring counter of 0 to 2 147 483 647 M8398 D 8399 in units of 1 ms 32 bit 1 1 ms ring counter D8399 D8398 will operate after M8398 turns ON D 8415 to D 8418 D 8419 Not use
128. em and aids in shielding noise from the programmable logic controller 2 Caution for Analog Products in use The analog products have been found to be compliant to the European standards in the aforesaid manual and directive However for the very best performance from what are in fact delicate measuring and controlled output devices Mitsubishi Electric would like to make the following points As analog devices are sensitive by nature their use should be considered carefully For users of proprietary cables integral with sensors or actuators these users should follow those manufacturers installation requirements Mitsubishi Electric recommends that shielded cables be used If NO other EMC protection is provided users may experience temporary loss or accuracy between 10 10 in very heavy industrial areas However Mitsubishi Electric suggests that if adequate EMC precautions are followed for the users complete control system Sensitive analog cables should not be laid in the same trunking or cable conduit as high voltage cabling Where possible users should run analog cables separately Good cable shielding should be used When terminating the shield at Earth ensure that no earth loops are accidentally created When reading analog values EMC accuracy can be improved by averaging the readings This can be achieved either through functions on the analog product or through a user s program in the FX3s Series PLC main unit 11
129. ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 2 3 4 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case If an overload of the 24 V DC service power supply occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS c AUTION Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or po
130. equipment failures or malfunctions For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative 1 3 SS F 16 1 Outline Ta wn wn The memory cassette can be installed at the main unit and when installed the memory cassette s internal program is used in place of the internal EEPROM memory The loader function transfers reads and writes programs between the memory cassette and the internal EEPROM wh Ja uny S L 16 2 Specifications sgueu zuleN Buooys jqnosj _ Qi 16 2 1 Electrical specifications OCO eas F Max Allowable PROTECT Loader a 5y Model Name Max Memory Capacity Memory Type Write Switch ancien a a Q O 32 000 steps FX3G EEPROM 32L Ne FX3S Series PLC can hold 16 000 steps of EEPROM 10 000 times Provided Provided memory but user program capacity is limited to memory 4 000 steps 16 2 2 Part names and external dimensions Asowsy p sseg Unit mm inches 4 3 2 1 PROTECT SN 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ S8dIAaq eloads gt 9 6 0 38 1 RD key 5 Memory cassette fixing holes 2 93 2 Mounting holes Reading PLC memory cassette 6 PROTECT switch 2 RD LED 7 Detachment lever C 3 WR key 8 Main unit connector ap writing memory cassette gt PLC 2 3 4 WR LED E iq oO 151 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hard
131. er ones te a a a e 30 AA OULU PECCI ON S det2 ues dict teulat nce clonatieglat cates actiealet tecachocteteclatieie ales seace E 31 A421 Relay output SOECIIICATIONS 25sec ss oe ecco a e ie emcees ed 31 4 4 2 Transistor output SPECIFICATIONS ccc ceecccceeececeeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeceuececeeseeeseaceesseeeseaeeeeseseesaeseeeesaaeees 32 4 5 Performance Specifications sige e ieee E E EE E e TE E eae E E ae EES 33 4 6 External Dimensions Weight Accessories Installation cccccccccesseeeeeseeeeesseeeeeeeueeeeesaeeeeesaees 35 AO We INV AUN UNEASE as A a St eee ee ah eh Oi eal 35 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents A Tomna Peay OU 22552 82 2esgccueata satan auntenede as seateense aetna cme anaetceeazeaana ieee a eaees ase ange eee eae aane eee 36 4 7 1 Interpretation of terminal block layOut cccceeccccccesseeeceeeecececeueeeecseeseecessuceessesesessasseeseeesseages 36 Fe FA SIV Sl Baa are sates ates So senso crt os aes Aaatie eee oat sed same aot sere E a S 37 A TOEA S SRAME eee ee non Pe ee ee eee nee eee ere 37 LLA SE KOS 2 OMEN eoan e e e ented ths aaa louse denaventec atu Qesshas A ATENEA 38 FO FAIS B DI Pinetree OP er ee ean nce ee ae ee ere 38 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability 39 9 1 Versi n AMMONMAUOM sirenen eaa aa aE bemadasccminatlasaradshidanconscsansdsaddanackogeacieinseeccss 39 5 1 1 Manufacturer s s
132. er the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the rated voltage current and frequency of each terminal The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are
133. erial number check Method ccccccceeccececeeceeececeeeeeceeeceseucesseeessaeessaeeeesaees 39 ShA Version Check Methode T ainia T E a ob daasereuada neites 40 5 Tto Verlo upgrade NISTO V ans a a a a EE A 40 5 2 Programming TOOlApplica Dilly cates eae le satel ela ache etek ela oak take telecast al 40 5 2 1 Applicable versions Of programming tOOl ccccccceeecccceececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeceseeeceseeeeeeseeeeeseeeensaes 40 5 2 2 In the case of programming tool version not applicable ceccccsesseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaees 40 5 2 3 Program transfer speed and programming tools cccccecceeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeseeesaeeseeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeeas 41 5 2 4 Cautions on connecting peripheral equipment by way of expansion board or special adapter 41 5 2 5 Cautions on write during RUN cccceeccccsseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeeseeeeeessseeeeeesseeeeeseaeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeeas 42 5 3 Use of Built in USB Programming Polt ccccccccccsseeeeceeseeeceeseeeceeueeeceaseeessseeeeseseeesseseesssages 44 5 3 1 instalation o WS BrGriven sitios teased Noes caches ahead adie tal ee i ae ae bcboameceecteds 44 592 SOU WG VV ONS 2 oa dacs as costs tense cracks tessa piascigs Seca Facade N wc ees 44 5 4 Cautions on using FA transparent function in GOT1000 Series ceccceecceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeees 45 5 5 Cautions on using transparent port 2 port function of GOT F900 Series cec
134. erious accidents 1 2 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case If an overload of the 24 V DC service power supply occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case CAUTION Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that
135. ernally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock N S WEN Hed pue sounjee4 WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION OO Do not supply power to the 24V terminal 24 V DC service power supply on the main unit Doing so may cause damage to the product a3 Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit with a wire 2 mm or Se thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to Section 8 3 5 Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Noise resistance may be lower when the L and N wires of an AC power supply are not wired correctly 4 Please wire using the correct polarity a Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual 8 If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product a When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not ent
136. ersion Information UOI ONPO U 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability NO 5 1 Version Information SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 5 1 1 Manufacturer s serial number check method OO The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate and LOT indicated on 33 the front of the product Sa 2 1 Checking the name plate The year and month of production of the product can be checked from the manufacturer s serial number S N indicated on the label adhered to the right side of the product 4 Example nameplate a manufacturer s serial number 1340001 MITSUBISHI PR CONTROLLER z 700 240 vac E Tr MODEL FX3S 30MR ES ni 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 21W MITSUBISHI OUT 30VDC 240VDC zP Illl_ Right side 2A COS 1 t v we MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN Actual product nameplate differs from the example shown above Lescsccccecsce Lecccsccesctccd bvecceceececeed Lossssusssuussid Lanssosasannoni L 4 0 0 ot 6 J E Control number OL Month Example April ee 1 to 9 January to September a X October Y November Z December z Year Example 2013 Last two digit of year 2 Checking the front of the product The year and month of production of the product can be checked from the manufacturer s serial number a LOT on the front at the bottom of the produc
137. es such as fires or abnormal voltages and failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage g Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi h Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user or third person by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on sit
138. ething may be malfunctioning inside the PLC Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Special adapter connection error Check connection of the special adapter 134 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC Error operation code at error occurrence Parameter error M8064 D8064 Contents of error Action 6401 Program sum check error 6402 Memory capacity setting error STOP the PLC and correctly set the parameters 6404 Comment area setting error 6405 File register area setting error Stops e STOP the PLC and correctly set the special parameters 6420 ps Special parameter sum check error e Set special parameters correctly turn OFF the power and operation then turn ON the power e Check the contents of the special parameter error code D8489 confirm troubleshooting for special adapters 6421 Special parameters setting error special blocks and set special parameters correctly e Set special parameters correctly turn OFF the power and then turn ON the power Syntax error M8065 D8065 6501 Incorrect combination of instruction device symbol and device number e No setting value after OUT T or OUT C 6503 af ee e Insufficient number of operands for an applied instruction e Same label number is used more than once
139. ets 98 id Fee AN 6 0 T 6 reg 08 O aa mPa ee toner te ne ne One se E eee 98 WIZ S SPeClal Mata regis te enri E A sete eente sweachecex AREE 98 11 2 4 Use example of variable analog potentiometer cccccceccccceecceceeceeeesececeeeeseeeesseeessaeeesaaeees 99 11 3 Ulta Analog INDUC TUMCHON cassai inne cies uti dect ate EAR REE E ete ghataontedties 100 TESA IETS OF MUM OINS sz hc atc a a i aed Seat le A hese ee 100 TES Z PAD IICAD sR LC as sean ccsce as seus setae ange uses Secamncent ao ceencane E E dozeteueesecenscaates 100 11 3 3 Analog input performance SPeCIFICATIONS ccccecccceeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeseeceeseeeeeseecessaeeeeseeceesneeeeseesses 100 11 3 4 Analog input terminal blocK ces achnes tonciaue delnetaicet ievard anenddoenicasniarcbedduidaendlis ve seetanreuhietlatheauiannde sateets 101 ToS OMA TAY OU 5 na Ara baat acenaban vib wge cnn ant age N ew geeinaclenieaneen se eae ts 102 20 MAIO IOUT INE cee a E ec saceoeutcocemanes eae a a EA 102 tior Specialdata TEQISUCN wie sence aa aaas En het E E A aa Ea a sidth ees 102 11 3 8 Program CXAIN DIG c5sictaraienacencatatrettuantetatotucenettsedncuwenledmedensteunoxecneldateeiduadiavacuasnundencdnansdentedeecand 104 11 3 9 Changing of input CharacteristiCs ccccccceccccscesceeccesseeeceeeseeeecssseecsecseeeessageeeeseeaseesssagsenenees 104 11 3 10 Troubleshooting when using built in analog input ee ecceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesaeeeesaaeeeeeees 1
140. ette lt gt PLC EEPROM Memory Transfers by Loader Function The FX3G EEPROM 32L loader function WR and RD key operation is explained in this section e Program transfers reading writing are possible between the memory cassette and the PLC s internal EEPROM memory e The loader function is enabled while the PLC is stopped 16 7 1 Writing WR FX3G EEPROM 32L gt PLC A memory cassette program is written to the PLC s internal EEPROM memory Required condition The PLC must be stopped Install the memory cassette on the main unit Setting the PROTECT switch to ON on memory cassette s rear face prevents accidental overwriting of memory cassette program Refer to Section 16 3 for the installation procedure e Verify that the PLC power is OFF then install the memory cassette on the PLC e Turn the PLC power ON e Raise the memory cassette s eject lever UI J MITSUBISHI Press the WR key 1 time WR o i WR key To EET bn The WR LED lights and a preparation status is established OFF ON O PROTECT SW ll I I e To cancel press the RD key Press the WR key again Writing is executed and the WR LED blinks e It takes several seconds to write data to the built in EEPROM The WR LED flickers while data is written Remove the memory cassette from the main unit Writing is com
141. excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure Reference Reference GHEE S2fety Precautions ED Read these precautions before use 2 INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS WARNING ia e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work 50 Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Use the product within the generic environment specifications described in Section 4 1 of this manual Never use the product in areas with excessive dust oily smoke conductive dusts corrosive gas salt air Cl2 H2S SO2 or NO2 flammable gas vibration or impacts or expose it to high temperature condensation or rain and wind If the product is used in such conditions electric shock fire malfunctions deterioration or damage may occur Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly Doing so may cause device failures or malfunctions Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws Install the product on a flat surface If the mounting surface is rough undue force will be applied to the PC board thereby causing nonconformities Make sure to affix the expansion board with tapping screws Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Loose connections may cause malfunctions When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure that cut
142. f System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 1 Configuration of a Whole System 6 Examination of System Configuration 6 1 Configuration of a Whole System The configuration of a whole system is shown below as an example Configuration of a whole system Memory cassette Expansion boards E MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI 0 Special adapters Connector conversion adapter 6 1 1 Expansion board connector conversion adapter memory cassette system configuration One expansion board or connector conversion adapter and one memory cassette can be connected The figure below shows the combination of each product and the available connection positions e 1st position An expansion board connector conversion adapter or memory cassette can be connected e 2nd position A memory cassette can be connected Connect a connector conversion adapter to the 1st position of the BD slot The FX3G EEPROM 32L can be connected to the 2nd position BD 2nd position FX3G EEPROM 32L When the st position is used by BD 1st position an expansion board or connector e FX3G 4EX BD e FX3G 2EYT BD e FX3G 232 BD FX3G 422 BD conversion adapter the FX3G EEPROM 32L can be connected to the 2nd position e FX3G 485 BD e FX3G 485 BD RJ e FX3G 2AD BD e FX3G 1DA BD e FX3G 8AV BD FX3G EEPROM 32L 48
143. fore installing the unit in the enclosure For the connection procedure refer to Subsection 7 5 3 and Subsection 7 5 4 Installation procedure Make mounting holes in the mounting surface according to the external dimensions diagram Fit the main unit A in the right figure based on the holes and secure it with M4 screws B in the right figure The positions of screws refer to Subsection 7 4 1 7 5 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices This section explains the connecting methods for extension devices 7 5 1 Connection of extension devices This subsection explains the method for connecting the main unit expansion board connector conversion adapter and special adapters using the connection configuration example shown below Example of configuration Connector Special conversion Expansion adapter adapter board FX3S Series main unit Connecting Connecting Connecting method C methodB method A For the connection method A refer to Subsection 7 5 2 For the connection method B refer to Subsection 7 5 3 For the connection method C refer to Subsection 7 5 4 57 UOI ONPO U N S WEN Hed pue sounjee4 OO uononpou Np suoneoyioeds f Qi s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJS wasis CD uoneinByuo4y 8 Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Bun induy CO p h SJ9 UN0D peeds ubIH FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s
144. frequency Example 2 When HSCS instruction HSCR instruction or HSZ instruction is used and instructions related to positioning DRVI instruction Y000 is used Overall frequency 60 kHz 1 axis x 5 kHz 55 kHz lt High speed counter No gt lt Contents of use gt C237 1 phase 1 count input 10 KHz is input C253 2 phase 2 count input 5 kHz is input Total 15 k Hz lt 55 kHz Overall frequency 92 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 8 Examples of External Wiring Rotary Encoder 10 8 Examples of External Wiring Rotary Encoder UOI ONPO U 10 8 1 1 phase 1 input C235 to C245 NO The following examples of wiring apply to the cases where C235 is used When another high speed counter number is used wire the counter referring to the following diagrams It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables for connection cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 1 NPN open collector transistor output rotary encoder OO Rotary encoder 5 U ao a ype i a ee 55 4 ov 9 O Qi PLC 2 PNP open collector transistor output rotary encoder 8 3 9 a 8 i Rotary encoder Fuse 24 V DC 6 Class D goudi 25 OE i gt eis l 005 CAA a DN ete eee ee v 5 PLC 1 The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less e D 5 O lt T iq O 3 Q r O
145. g input output When using each product refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed and FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition Supplies FX3U 3A ADP Procedures for handling the 2 ch analog input and 1 ch with JY997D35601 product User s Manual analog output special adapter Manuals for positioning control E Common Additional PASIPO ae OUFE Details of positioning functions of FX3S FX3G FX3GC Series User s Manual JY997D16801 O9R620 Manual ae oi FX3U FX3UC Series Positioning Control Edition Manuals for FX 30P Supplied FX 30P Describes FX 30P specification extracted from the FX with aetallahoncAiennal JY997D34201 30P Operation manual product For details refer to FX 30P Operation manual AGGNONA PAT JY997D34401 Describes Handy Programming Panel FX 30P details Manual Operation Manual Other manuals 09R924 When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed E Input extension Supplied with PA OREA DD JY997D51301 Procedures for handling the 4 points input expansion i User s Manual board product E Output extension Suppligg FX3G 2EYT BD Procedures for handling the 2 points transistor output with JY997D51401 sroduct User s Manual expansion board E Variable analog potentiometers Procedures for handling the 8 ch variable analog Supplied FX3G 8AV
146. g operation direction mismatch lt Auto tuning is forcibly finished PID operation is not Qo lt Limit cycle method gt started gt 33 6754 Abnormal PV threshold hysteresis set value for auto tuning Check whether the target setting contents are correct ae SHPV lt 0 B lt Limit cycle method gt lt Auto tuning is forcibly finished gt PID operation is not 6755 Abnormal auto tuning transfer status started gt 2 Data of device controlling transfer status is abnormally Ensure that devices occupied by PID instruction are not S overwritten overwritten in the program o lt Auto tuning is forcibly finished gt PID operation is not T started gt The auto tuning time is longer than necessary lt gt SEE Coane ee Increase the difference ULV LLV between the upper limit C 6756 Abnormal result due to excessive auto tuning measurement ect i and lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set a 30 time ton gt t ton lt 0 t lt 0 OG smaller value to the input filter constant a or set a smaller z value to the PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning and then d check the result for improvement S SL 137 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC Error operation code at error occurrence Operation error M8067 D8067 Contents of err
147. g rammable Controllers 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 2 Expansion Board 15 2 7 FX3G 2AD BD External Dimensions e MASS Weight Approx 20 g 0 05 Ibs e Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board Unit mm inches Side cover S Manual supplied with N product LO e Terminal block European type 15 2 8 FX3G 1DA BD External Dimensions e MASS Weight Approx 20 g 0 05 Ibs e Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board Unit mm inches c Side cover S Manual supplied with N product LO e Terminal block European type 148 FX3S Series Prog rammable Controllers 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 2 Expansion Board 15 2 9 FX3G 8AV BD External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 20 g 0 05 Ibs e Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board Side cover Trimmer layout S label N Manual supplied with io product 149 Bojeuy ul jing Buum nding N 10 Buum OO s sN SNOEN Ja sgueu zuleN uNY S L O E e 4 nN O r Q IXJ 1940 s uoisue p sseg KJOW N 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ saoinaq jeloeds s
148. gram 4 2 M8000 Q RUN monitor Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring 7 segment display to be used for sink wiring in the case of transistor output Jo Bulli s sSN SNOEN Main unit Example FX3S 30MT ES aN Transistor output sink com3 Yoos Yoo7 Yo10 Yo11 com4 Yo12 Yo13 Yo14 Yo15 terme TE p T M a a P ecu a D 3 Q _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ 1940 2 In the case of source wiring s uoisue 7 segment display to be used for source wiring in the case of transistor output p sseg KJOW N Main unit Example FX3S 30MT ESS Transistor output source j J ji Je ja je 0008d 0008W ML num i ll isuononasuy YY saoinag jeioads sj pow penuljuoosiq 123 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS N WARN N G e Do not touch any terminal while the PLC s power is on Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions e Before cleaning or retightening terminals cut off all phases of the power supply externally Failure to do so may cause electric shock e Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC carefully read through this manual and the associated manuals and ensure the safet
149. gramming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction Edition Abbreviation of FX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition Abbreviation of FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual MODBUS Serial Communication Edition Abbreviation of FX3S FX3G F X3GC FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition Abbreviation of FX3S FX3G F X3GC F X3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Positioning Control Edition Abbreviation of FX3U ENET ADP User s Manual 17 uononpou N S WEN Hed pue soinjeo4 Oo uononpou Np suoneoyioeds f Qi s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJS wasis CD uoneinByuoy uo ejesu i oo Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Bun induy CO p 2EY usiH sJ9 uno9 peeds FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 Features and Part Names 2 1 Major Features 2 Features and Part Names 2 1 Major Features 1 Basic functions Up to 30 input output points Main units are available in models of 10 14 20 and 30 total input output points Memory capacity The PLC has a 16 K step EEPROM memory Program capacity is 4 K steps Built in USB port The PLC has a built in USB port for the programming communication function to enable high speed communication at 12 Mbps Built in RUN STOP switch The PLC can be started and stopped with the built in switch RUN and STOP commands can be given to the PLC through a general purp
150. gt product specifications Y axis re NOOO T 10000 P n 3 e g i o 5 8 A O Da 500 z 8 S W P oz i Aaa 1000 7 I l i X r 0 1v 5 V gt 10V ol100 1v 500 5 v gt Analog input oe Digital value actually obtained by A D conversion 2 Example of program For example create the following program to change the digital input data menor FNC 12 as Sets the averaging scaling to 1 for Normally ON MOV the channel 1 data ee FNC 12 D8270 D110 Normally ON MOV FNC230 FNC237 Check to make sure the digital value D110 K100 D110 K500 M100 D110 is in range M100 FNC 21 D110 K100 D111 FNC 22 Calculation for changing input D111 K10000 D112 characteristics Stores the operation result in D100 FNC 23 ppiy 2112 K400 D100 104 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of Built in Analog User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 3 Built in analog input function 11 3 10 Troubleshooting when using built in analog input 1 This subsection describes troubleshooting methods and error statuses If the A D conversion data is not input or if the proper digital value is not input check the following items e Wiring e Special devices e Programs Wiring check Check the following items for wiring e Use 2 core twisted shielded pair cable for the analog input line In addition be sure to separate the analog input line from other power lines or inductive lines For a det
151. he output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS c AUTION Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure 73 uononpou N S WEN Hed pue sounjee4 OO uononpou Np suoneoyioeds f Qi s3919 jesOydued pue UOISJS wasis uoneinByuoy uoneleysu A O0 Q ae 28 o 2 D oe O O Ge eet lt 8 ox Bui induy i uH s13 UN09 peeds FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition WIRING PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock WIRING PRECAUTIONS N
152. he sink input circuit and the source input circuit e Sink input common Sink input means a DC input signal with current flow from the input X terminal When a sensor with a transistor output is connected NPN open collector transistor output can be used SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 Oo an 38 3A e Source input common 4 Source input means a DC input signal with current flow into the input a X terminal When a sensor with a transistor output is connected PNP open collector transistor output can be used 3 Qi Sos 2 Method of switching between sink source input To switch the input type to sink or source input wire the S S terminal to the OV or 24V or terminal 6 e Inthe case of AC power type e Sink input 24V terminal and S S terminal are connected 22 Source input OV terminal and S S terminal are connected 5 For wiring examples refer to Subsection 9 2 3 e Inthe case of DC power type Sink input terminal and S S terminal are connected T Source input terminal and S S terminal are connected z For wiring examples refer to Subsection 9 2 4 3 Cautions for using p Mixed use of sink source inputs It is possible to set all input terminals X of the main unit to either sink input or source input mode 8 However a mixture of sink and source input terminals cannot be set within a single unit 2 Fp o 2 D oe O O Ge eet lt 8 ox Differences from FX1s P
153. hieve the appropriate tightening torque shown in de iP el Ce the table above use the following screwdriver or appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25 mm 0 98 S17 UONONSU gJ saoinaq jeloeds lt Reference gt Manufacturer Model name Phoenix Contact Co Ltd SZS 0 4x2 5 C 39 On a0 OO na 5 4p Q 101 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of Built in Analog User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 3 Built in analog input function 11 3 5 Terminal layout Terminal layout is arranged as follows e e e channel 1 analog input e e e channel 2 analog input e e e COM terminal 11 3 6 Analog input line VO IO chO O represents the channel number 1 Use the 2 core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog input lines and separate the analog input lines from other power lines or inductive lines 2 Make sure to short circuit the VL and V terminals when ch is not used 11 3 7 Special data register The following is a list of associated special devices D8270 Channel 1 input data R D8271 Channel 2 input data R D8272 Unused Do not use D8273 D8274 Averaging time for channel 1 Setting range 1 to 4095 R W D8275 Averaging time for channel 2 Setting range 1 to 4095 R W D8276 Unused Do not use D8277 D8279 Model code R 1 Input data The data converted by the PLC will be stored in special data registers The converted A D immediate data or ave
154. hten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed 64 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 1 Preparation for Wiring 8 1 Preparation for Wiring UOI ONPO U 8 1 1 Wiring procedures NO Before starting wiring work make sure that the main power is off Prepare the parts for wiring SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 Prepare the solderless terminals and cables necessary for wiring For details refer to Section 8 2 OO Wire the power supply terminals a In the case of AC power type ge e Conne
155. ibes installation and specifications for the FX3U ets FX3U ENET ADP yyo97D47401 ENET ADP Ethernet communication special adapter product Installation Manual extracted from the FX3U ENET ADP User s Manual When using refer to FX3U ENET ADP User s Manual Additional eae ia JY997D45801 Describes FX3U ENET ADP Ethernet communication 09R725 Manual User s Manual special adapter details 14 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals Manual Model E RS 232C RS 422 RS 485 When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed and FX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition For the MODBUS communication refer to the FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual MODBUS Serial Communication Edition Suppliga FX3G 232 BD Procedures for handling the RS 232C communication with JY997D32001 Installation Manual special adapter product Supplied ean FX3U 232ADP MB Procedures for handling the RS 232C communication with JY997D26401 produci Installation Manual special adapter Suppea FX3U 232ADP Procedures for handling the RS 232C communication with JY997D13701 produci Installation Manual special adapter uononpou N S WEN Hed pue soinjeo4 Oo SU 390 O lot supplied FX3G 422 BD Procedures for handling the communication eS with JY997D32101 m Installation Manu
156. ications external dimensions and terminal layout of the main units 4 1 Generic Specifications The generic specifications for the main unit are explained below Item Specification Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating and 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored Ambient humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Frequency Hz Acceleration m s Half amplitude mm iaar a i sii Sweep Count for srtotso a XY 2 10 times When installed on Vibration resistance DIN rail When installed directly 10 to 57 0 075 80 min in each 147 m s Acceleration Action time 11 ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z Shock resistance Insulation resistance 5 MQ or more by 500 V DC megger Noise resistance By noise simulator at noise voltage of 1 000 Vp p noise width of 1 us rise time of 1 ns and period of 30 to 100 Hz Dielectric withstand 1 5 kV AC for 1 min voltage 500 V AC for 1 min Between each terminals and ground terminal G di Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less roundin x lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt a Working atmosphere Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dust Working altitude lt 2000 m4 1 The criterion is shown in IEC61131 2 2 For more information on the dielectric withstand voltage test and the insulation resistance test of the terminals of each produ
157. iding the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion 181 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Revised History Revised History Date Revision Description 5 2013 A First Edition 9 2013 e The following products are added Main unit of the built in analog input FX3S 30MR ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD Main unit of DC power supply type FX3S 10MR DS FX3S 14MR DS FX3S 20MR DS FX3S 30MR DS FX3S 10MT DS FX3S 14MT DS FX3S 20MT DS FX3S 30MT DS FX3S 10MT DSS FX3S 14MT DSS FX3S 20MT DSS FX3S 30MT DSS Expansion board FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2EYT BD FX3G 485 BD RJ e Ver 1 10 is supported Supports FX3G 4EX BD Supports FX3G 2EYT BD e Errors are corrected FX3S SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS USER S MANUAL Hardware Edition MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN HIMEJI WORKS 840 CHIYODA CHO HIMEJI JAPAN 09R535 JY997D48601B Effective Sep 2013 MEE Specifications are subject to change without notice
158. imeji Hyogo 670 8677 Japan e Authorized Representative in the European Community Mitsubishi Electric Europe B V Gothaer Str 8 40880 Ratingen Germany FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Standards Type Programmable Controller Open Type Equipment Models MELSEC FX3s series FX3G series FX3U series manufactured from June 1st 2005 from April 1st 2007 from December 1st 2007 from November 1st 2008 from June 1st 2009 from February 1st 2012 from March 1st 2013 from September 1st 2013 FX3U 232ADP FX3U 485ADP FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3G 232 BD FX3G 422 BD FX3G 485 BD FX3G EEPROM 32L FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 1DA BD FX3G 8AV BD FX3U 3A ADP FX3U ENET ADP FX3S MR ES FX3S MT ES FX3S MT ESS Where x indicates 10 14 20 30 FX3S CNV ADP FX3S MR DS FX3S xMT DS FX3S MT DSS Where indicates 10 14 20 30 FX3S 30MR ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2EYT BD FX3G 485 BD RJ Standard Remark EN61131 2 2007 Programmable controllers Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard Equipment requirements and tests EMI e Radiated Emission e Conducted Emission EMS e Radiated electromagnetic field e Fast transient burst e Electrostatic discharge e High energy surge e Voltage drops and interruptions e Conducted RF e Po
159. ing screwdriver or appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25 mm 0 98 1 0 lt Reference gt oz SF Manufacturer Model name oD N Oo Phoenix Contact Co Ltd SZS 0 4x2 5 2 67 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 2 Cable Connecting Procedures 8 2 3 Grounding terminal of the FX3G 485 BD RJ The grounding terminal of the FX3G 485 BD RJ is a terminal blocks for Europe 1 Applicable cables Electric wire size AWG 20 to 16 2 Treatment of electric wire ends e When using a stranded cable or solid cable as it is Twist the end of the stranded cable so that loose wires will not stick out Do not solder plate the end of the cable Approx 6 mm 0 24 3 Tightening torque Set the tightening torque to 0 5 to 0 6 Nem Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Caution When tightening a grounding terminal use a screwdriver suitable for the terminal screw The screwdriver which does not suit the thread groove is used tightening torque will not be able to be achieved To achieve the appropriate tightening torque shown in the above use the following screwdriver or an appropriate replacement lt Reference gt Manufacturer Model name Phoenix Contact Co Ltd SZF 1 0 6x3 5 68 FX3S Series Programmable C
160. ion Correspond ing special device High speed counter up down counter monitoring M 8246 M 8247 M 8248 M 8249 M 8250 M 8251 M 8252 M 8253 M 8254 M 8255 M 8256 to M 8259 Not used C246 C250 When COOLI of 1 phase 2 input counter or 2 phase 2 C249 input counter is in down mode the corresponding M8u turns ON OFF 7 Down count operation ON Up count operation Analog expansion board Refer to Appendix A 3 for details M8260 to M8269 M 8270 to M 8279 Not used Expansion board Analog special adapter Refer to Appendix A 4 for details M8280 to M8289 Special adapter M 8290 to M 8299 Flag M 8300 to M 8303 M 8304 Zero M 8305 M 8306 Carry M 8307 to M 8311 M 8312 1 M 8313 to M 8328 M 8329 Not used Turns ON when the multiplication or i division result is 0 Not used Turns ON when the division result overflows Not used Real time clock data lost error Not used Instruction execution abnormal end Backed up against power interruption and automatically cleared when M8312 itself is cleared or when the clock data is set again 164 Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 08 Correspond Correspond Number and name Operation and function ing special Number and name
161. j pow penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Prog rammable Controllers 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 3 Connector Conversion Adapter 15 3 Connector Conversion Adapter 15 3 1 FX3s CNV ADP External Dimensions Connector conversion adapter main body e MASS Weight 0 1 kg 0 22 Ibs Unit mm inches Accessories Four M3x8 tapping screws ne for installation of adapter Manual supplied with product A O 74 2 92 Connector conversion adapter board 15 4 Interface Module 15 4 1 FX 232AWC H External Dimensions e Accessories Manual supplied with product MITSUBISHI e Connector RS 232C D SUB 25 pin C POWER female l EA RS 422 D SUB 25 pin x 2 female Screw for securing connector M2 6 screw FX 232AWC H 25 0 99 150 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 1 Outline SEU gt 16 Memory Cassette z amp STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE 1 2 O PRECAUTIONS CAUTION e Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the memory cassette If the memory cassette is attached or detached while the PLC s power is on the data in the memory may be destroyed or the memory cassette may be damaged 2 e Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause fire
162. je Supp lee FX3U 4AD ADP Procedures for handling the 4 ch analog input special S with JY997D13901 User s Manual adapter product eupp lee FX3U 4AD PT ADP Procedures for handling the 4 ch Pt100 temperature 8 with JY997D14701 User s Manual sensor input special adapter product SUD Supplied g FX3U 4AD PTW ADP Procedures for handling the 4 ch Pt100 temperature ea with i JY997D29101 i no User s Manual sensor input special adapter So product 2o lt Supplied 2 FX3U 4AD PNK ADP Procedures for handling the 4 ch Pt1000 Ni1000 with i JY997D29201 i User s Manual temperature sensor input special adapter 9 product Supplied 5 with A A T ADE JY997D14801 Procedures for handling the 4 ch thermocouple input i 2 User s Manual special adapter product 3 i uH s13 UN09 peeds 15 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals Manual Model Manual Name NurDET Contents Code E Analog output When using each product refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed and FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition supple FX3G 1DA BD Procedures for handling the 1 ch analog output expansion with JY997D33601 Installation Manual board product Suppligg FX3U 4DA ADP Procedures for handling the 4 ch analog output special with JY997D14001 User s Manual adapter product E Analo
163. l not connected to the S S terminal and When input does not turn on the input terminal with a tester to confirm that the voltage is 24 V DC Check the configuration of the external wiring and connected devices 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ saoinaq jeloeds 2 Input does not turn off Check for leakage current from input devices If the leakage current is larger than 1 5 mA it is necessary to connect a bleeder resistance For details on the measures refer to Subsection 9 2 2 sj pow penuljuoosiq 139 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 7 Troubleshooting 14 7 3 Cautions in registering keyword 1 Cautions in registering keyword The keyword limits access to the program prepared by the user from peripheral devices Keep the keyword carefully If you forget the keyword you cannot operate the PLC online from the programming tool depending on the type of the programming tool and the registered keyword 2 Caution on using a peripheral device which does not support the second keyword and customer keyword Sequence programs in which the second keyword and customer keyword are registered cannot be all cleared using a peripheral device that does not support the second keyword and customer keyword 3 Non resettable protect function When the non resettable protect function is set the protect function cannot
164. l Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 2 Transistor output Source 100 to 240 V AC Breaker Main unit transistor output Source O Power supply for load connected to PLC output EE l For details on emergency stop operation refer to DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field 1 The output circuit of this PLC does not have a built in fuse Provide a fuse suitable to each load to prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit board caused by output element fracture due to load short circuiting 2 e represents vacant terminals WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Do not wire the vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 116 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 EU 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses 5 12 DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING 3 e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure 2 Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits lt 2 Note that when the PLC C
165. l conditions generic specifications The PLC can be installed by the following two methods 1 Installing on DIN rail e The PLC can be installed on a DIN46277 rail 35 mm 1 38 wide e The PLC can be easily moved and removed e The PLC is installed higher by the height of the DIN rail For details on the procedures on mounting and removing the DIN rail refer to Section 7 3 2 Direct installing with screws e The PLC can be installed directly in the enclosure with M4 screws For the mounting hole pitch refer to Section 7 4 7 3 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail The main unit can be installed on a DIN46277 rail 35 mm 1 38 wide 7 3 1 Preparation for installation 1 Connecting extension devices Some extension devices must be mounted on the main unit before the unit is installed in the enclosure e Mount the special adapter or connector conversion adapter FX3S CNV ADP on the main unit before installing the main unit to the enclosure e The expansion boards and memory cassette can be fitted to the main unit after it is installed 2 Affixing the dust proof sheet The dust proof sheet should be affixed to the ventilation port before beginning the installation and wiring work Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet when the installation and wiring work is completed For the affixing procedure refer to the instructions on the dust proof sheet 53 UOI ONPO U N S WE
166. l equipment connecting These holes are designed to secure the expansion board and memory cassette with screws S D screw holes 2 places When the terminal block covers are open 6 1 2 On So 2 je Se MITSUBISHI MELSEE FXas D v 2 5 4 3 8 292 O 1 Power supply terminals Connect the power supply to the main unit a ae 2 Input X terminals Wire switches and sensors to the terminals z 7o 3 Output Y terminals Wire loads contactors solenoid valves etc to be driven to the terminals 2a 4 Terminal cover A protective terminal cover refer to the following drawing is fitted to the lower stage of each terminal block 9 The cover prevents fingers from touching terminals thereby improving safety 5 O WOQOOQOOQOOOCOOCD j 5 Service power supply terminals Wire sensors or other external equipment to these terminals when the service power supply B only AC power type 24 V DC is used for such equipment i uH s13 UN0N peeds 21 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 2 Features and Part Names User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts 2 2 2 Sides AC Power Type DC power type 1 Connector conversion adapter These holes are designed to secure the connector conversion adapter with screws connecting screw holes 2 places 2 Analog input terminal
167. l system Stored program repetitive operation system with interruption function 2 Batch processing system when END instruction is executed Ipp iy opit Celis SRE Input output refresh instruction and pulse catch function are provided Programming language Relay symbol system step ladder system SFC notation possible S WEN Hed pue sounjee4 16 000 steps EEPROM memory Program capacity is 4000 steps Max allowable write 20 000 times 32 000 steps EEPROM memory with loader function The FX3S Series PLC is available only to 16 000 steps Program capacity is 4000 steps Max allowable write 10 000 times Built in memory capacity type Memory cassette Option OO Program memory ONpod Provided Program can be modified while the PLC is running For the writing function during running refer to Subsection 5 2 5 5 2 O r Writing function during running Keyword function With keyword Customer keyword function Built in Real time clock Clock function 1980 to 2079 with correction for leap year 2 or 4 digit year accuracy within 45 seconds month at 25 C Sequence instructions 29 Step ladder instructions 2 Basic instructions Kinds of instructions suo1 e91 0 d9 Applied instructions 116 kinds Basic instructions 0 21 us instruction Processing speed Applied instructions 0 5 us to several hundred us instruction 5 Number of input lnput points 16
168. link non protocol separate communication and programming manual communication The manuals for FX3S Series will be available in or after May 2013 FX uoneljeysu i User s Manual Analog Control Edition JY997D16701 Model FX3U U ANALOG E Details of analog expansion boards and analog special adapters Bui A ddns Jamod Bum induy Q pue uonevedaiy CO Manuals supplied with product FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC separate manual The manuals for FX3S Series will be available in or after May 2013 Each product comes with the installation manual or the User s Manual Installation manual The part names installation procedures and specifications are shown As for the functions and program examples refer to the separate User s Manual OOO Edition User s Manual Positioning Control Edition JY997D16801 Model FX3U U POS E Details of wiring instructions and FX3S FX3G FX3GC operations of positioning functions in User s manual The procedures for wiring and installing specifications fais PLC main unit 1 0 separate manua and functions are explained i The manuals for FX3S Series will be 9E available in or after May 2013 SP To use some products separate manuals may be necessary a A 49 Q 13 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals 1 1 3 List of manuals FX3S Series PLC main units
169. llel link character error operation 6313 Parallel link sum error 6314 Parallel link format error 6321 MODBUS communication error 6330 Memory access error 6340 Action When the memory cassette is used check whether it is mounted correctly If the problem persists or if the memory cassette is not used something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Check user program The scan time exceeds the value stored in D8000 Check the cable connection between the programming panel PP programming device and the PLC This error may occur when a cable is disconnected and reconnected during PLC When the memory cassette is used check whether it is mounted correctly If the problem persists or if the memory cassette is not used something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Ethernet communication Inverter communication computer link and programming Ensure that the parameters are correctly set according to their applications N N network parallel link MODBUS communication etc Check programs according to applications Remote maintenance Ensure modem power is ON and check the settings of the AT commands Wiring Check the communication cables for correct wiring When the memory cassette is used check whether it is mounted correctly If the problem persists or if the memory cassette is not used som
170. mable Controllers 2 Features and Part Names User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts When the top covers are open 1 2 5 mr Ss Q Q Q z O SOWeN Hed pue soinjeo4 FX3s 30MR ES a V COM OO 5 Ea oa 7 25 S 1 Optional equipment connector These holes are designed to secure the expansion board and memory cassette with screws 2 RUN STOP switch To stop writing batch of the sequence program or operation set the switch to STOP slide it downward 4 To start operation run the machine set it to RUN slide it upward oy 3 Variable analog potentiometers Two variable analog potentiometers are built in 3 except FX3S 30ML1 EL 2AD Upper side VR1 Lower side VR2 4 Analog input terminal block Two analog inputs are built in 5 only FX3S 30MO EO 2AD These terminals are for wiring the analog inputs 5 Peripheral device connecting Connect a programming tool PC to program a sequence connector USB For details on applicable peripheral devices refer to Chapter 5 5 6 Peripheral device connecting Connect a programming tool to program a sequence gp S connector RS 422 For details on applicable peripheral devices refer to Chapter 5 so 2 7 Optiona
171. manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed 3 GHEE S2fety Precautions ED Read these precautions before use 4 STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS WARNING 7 Do not touch any terminal while the PLC s power is on Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions Before cleaning or retightening terminals cut off all phases of the power supply externally Failure to do so may cause electric shock Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC carefully read through this manual and the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices at the same time i e from a programming tool and a GOT Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the PLC program 124 CAUTION Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the memory cassette If the memory cassette is attached or detached while the PLC s power is on the data in the memory may be destroyed or the memory cassette may be damaged Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing s
172. mergency stop operation refer to DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field Qi Oo Uv lt o O D In the case of source input wiring Sos on S D Q OVU S as 3 z gt 1 Connect the AC power supply to the L and N terminals in any case of 100 V AC system and 200 V AC system As for the details see WIRING PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field 2 The OV and 24V terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 wn v D r O Bui Aj ddns Jamod Bum nduy QO pue uonevedaig h SJ9 UN0D peeds ubiH 71 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 5 Examples of External Wiring DC power type 8 5 Examples of External Wiring DC power type 24 V DC Circuit protector QS gt ye 7 j In the case of sink input wiring k i mergency stop Mainunt I Yea 2 oo f CI D g e a Sa Sa _ bat Input impedance Si ae att vo adil COM3 Power supply for load connected to PLC output E For details on emergency stop operation refer to DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field In the case of source input wiring Te Q EEA r Load 1 Connect DC power to and terminals As for the details see WIRING PRECAUTIONS at Safety
173. minal block of main unit is the M3 screw For the terminal block of a built in analog input refer to Chapter 11 1 Terminal block screw size and tightening torque The terminal block screw and tightening torque is shown below 2 Wire end treatment The solderless terminal size depends on the terminal screw size and wiring method Use solderless terminals of the following size Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0 5 to 0 8 Nem Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions e When one wire is connected to one terminal Terminal Crimp 3 2 0 137 screw terminal 6 2 mm 0 24 or less 3 2 0 137 6 2 mm 0 24 Se oA or less lt Reference gt Terminal Manufacturer Type No Certification Pressure Bonding Tool FV1 25 B3A JAPAN SOLDERLESS TERMINAL FV1 25 B3A P moe MFG CO LTD JST FV2 MS3 e When two wires are connected to one terminal 3 2 0 137 Terminal Crimp 6 2 mm 0 24 JEC screw terminal or less 6 3 mm or 25 or more 3 2 0 137 6 2 mm 0 24 Se er eee Si Terminal 6 3 mm 0 25 or more lt Reference gt Terminal Manufacturer Type No Certification Pressure Bonding Tool JAPAN SOLDERLESS TERMINAL MFG CO LTD JST a UL Listed YA 1 JST 66 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 2 Cable Connecting
174. minal for each model refer to the Section 4 7 e 1 output point common terminal 2 A or less Max load e 4 output points common terminal 8 A or less 80 VA UL and cUL standards approved at 120 and 240 V AC Inductive load For the product life refer to Subsection 14 4 2 D For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 1 3 8 Min load 5 V DC 2 mA reference value 4 O n Open circuit leakage current OFF ON Response time ONOFF Approx 10 ms Output circuit insulation Mechanical insulation Qi OUUV lt Output operation display LED on panel lights when power is applied to relay coil 2 amp zi 839 ag Q Output circuit confi ti Load 23 utput circuit configuration oa na eo E 3 AC power supply S H COM Fuse 7 A common number applies to the U of COMU _ a v a FE a s2 oo 2a 2 5 O a i uH sJ9 uno9 peeds 31 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 4 Output Specifications 4 4 2 Transistor output specifications Transistor output specification FX3S 10MTLI FX3S 14MTL FX3S 20MTL FX3S 30MTL Output connecting type Fixed terminal block M3 screw Transistor sink output FX3S LIMT LIS FX3S 30MT ES 2AD Transistor source output FX3S LIMT LISS FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD External power supply 5 to 30 V DC 0 5 A point The to
175. ms reaches the set averaging time After this the average data will be stored cF e Set the averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set value is outside the setting range an error signal will be output Ja e Ifthe averaging time is set to 0 or smaller the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to 1 If the averaging time is set to 4096 or larger the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to 4096 3 For a detailed description of the error refer to Subsection 11 3 10 E 3 Error status 2 3 If an error is detected in the PLC the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data _ Qi Special data register Description D8278 Error status suo do pue sun XZ 194 O Check the ON OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to check the description of the error Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table Create a program to detect errors For a detailed description of the error status refer to Subsection 11 3 10 s uoisue p sseg KJOW N Bit Description bO Channel 1 over scale detection b1 Channel 2 over scale detection b2 Unused b3 Unused b4 EEPROM error Sg b5 Averaging time setting error common ch1 and ch2 S2 b6 to b15 Unused s 2 4 Model code When the analog built in main unit is connected model co
176. n FNC150 and ZRN instruction FNC156 s uoisue Ones YOOO Clear signal device NIBOR specification a os DSZR_ instruction FNC150 and 2a D 8465 ZRN instruction FNC156 M8465 Y001 Clear signal device specification Dieas io DaS 7 Error detection D18468 10 8486 D 8487 USB communication error M8487 3 pezes D 8489 Error code for special parameter M8489 a6 error FX3U ENET ADP ch1 S17 UONONSUy gJ saoinaq jeloeds D 8492 IP address setting Low order D 8493 IP address setting High order D 8494 Subnet mask setting Low order D 8495 Subnet mask setting High order Default router IP address setting eae Low order j C r 30 D 8497 Default router IP address setting a 2 High order ae D 8498 Error code for IP address storage i D area write D 8499 Error code for IP address storage 7 area clear 1500 to IES 3 171 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 3 Analog expansion boards M8260 to M8269 and D8260 to D8269 Appendix A 3 Analog expansion boards M8260 to M8269 and D8260 to D8269 When analog expansion boards are connected operations and functions are assigned to the devices shown in the tables Devices which cannot be written are shaded in Operation and function column For details refer to the Analog Control Edition Appendix A 3 1 Special auxiliary relays M8260 to
177. n of operation Review the in CALL instruction as P63 is for jumping to END program and check the contents of the operands used in instruction applied instructions 6702 CALL instruction nesting level is 6 or more Even if the syntax or circuit design is correct an operation error may still occur 6704 FOR NEXT instruction nesting level is 6 or more For example 6705 Operand of applied instruction is inapplicable device T1002 itself is not an error But if Z had a value of 100 the timer T200 would attempt to be accessed This would cause Device number range or data value for operand of applied i i 6706 aa an operation error since there is no T200 device available instruction exceeds limit 6709 Continues Other e g improper branching operauon This error occurs when the same device is used within the 6710 Mismatch among parameters SE Bp source and destination in a shift instruction etc 6730 Incorrect sampling time TS TS lt 0 Incompatible input filter constant a Ora a lt 0 or 100 lt a oo lt PID instruction is stopped gt 6733 Incompatible proportional gain KP KP lt 0 This error occurs in the parameter setting value or operation 6734 Incompatible integral time TI TI lt 0 data executing PID instruction ae incompatible derivative gain KD Check the contents of the parameters KD lt 0 or 201 lt KD 6736 Incompatible derivative time TD TD lt 0 136 FX3S Series Prog
178. n output is refreshed When the PLC is a relay output type a mechanical delay in operation approx 10 ms is caused Therefore it is best to use a transistor output type PLC Applied instruction Limitation in number of instructions driven at same time HSCS instruction HSCR instruction 6 instructions HSZ instruction 1 The overall frequency changes when the HSCS instruction HSCR instruction or HSZ instruction is used For details on the overall frequency refer to Section 10 7 91 UOI ONPO U N S WEN Hed pue sounjee4 OO uononpou Np suoneoyioeds f Qi s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJS wasis CD uoneinByuoy uoneleysu A oo Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid 2a 3 5 5 amp FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 7 Response Frequency and Overall Frequency 10 7 Response Frequency and Overall Frequency 1 Response frequency and overall frequency When any of the following functions instructions is used the overall frequency is restricted without regard to the operand of the instruction Consider this restriction when examining the system or creating programs and observe the specified overall frequency range e When two or more high speed counters are used e When the HSCS instruction HSCR instruction HSZ instruction PLSY instruction PLSR instruction DSZR instruction ZRN instruction
179. n to forcibly turn on timers is effective only when the timers are driven by the program The results of forcible ON OFF operation performed while the PLC in the stopped state or performed for devices not used in the program are retained However the results of the operation performed for the input relays X are not retained because the relays refresh input even while the PLC is in the stopped state They are updated according to the input terminal conditions AA S S 2 Since the current values may be changed according to MOV instruction in the program and the operation results the most recently obtained values are retained 3 Change of timer and counter settings The settings of the timers T and counters C can be changed only when the timers are driven by the program 14 3 3 Program modification function The sequence program can be transferred while the PLC is running or in the stopped state as shown below v Effective Ineffective pai Item stopped status Batch writing of file registers D Pe y Writing of program to PLC A Modification of whole program batch writing a v Writing of parameters to PLC v Writing of comments to PLC l 4 1 Since the writing function is used during running the programming tool must support the write during RUN function such as GX Worksz2 For the writing function during running refer to Subsection 5 2 5 129 Bojeuy ul jing Buum ndino NS h Jo buum O
180. nector cover A in the 33 right figure e a 252 FE Remove the part B shown in the right figure Tmrsuasn i using a nipper etc a 5 15 RD 32L lt PLC O S Q Cauti po SEa ee OC ai 730 Removal of the part B is not necessary when the connector D conversion adapter is used together Raise the memory cassette detachment lever C in the right figure Asowsy ajjesse9 Attach the memory cassette to the option connector D in the right figure of the expansion board or connector conversion adapter 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ s n d jeloeds sj pow penuljuoosiq 153 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 Memory Cassette 16 3 Installation Fix the memory cassette F in the right figure with provided M3 tapping screws E in the right figure to the expansion board or connector conversion adapter e Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem Caution e Two types of M3 tapping screws are provided Use M3x16 longer screws e Fixation is not necessary when using only the loader function and not always connecting the memory cassette 154 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 4 Removal 11 16 4 Removal 5 Be sure that the power is OFF when removing the memory cassette J 16 4 1 Removal 12 when the expansion board connector conversion adapter are not u
181. ng can be selected 10 2 1 Types and input signal forms The types and input signals waveforms of high speed counters 1 phase 1 count input 1 phase 2 count input and 2 phase 2 count input are shown below High speed Input signal form Counting direction counter type Down count or up count is specified by turning on or off 1 phase 1 count M8235 to M8245 input uPDown_ f Lf Lf Lt Le ON Down counting OFF Up counting Up count or down count The counting direction can be checked with M8246 to M8250 ON Down counting OFF Up counting 1 phase 2 count input A Automatic up count or down count according to change in spas i input status of phase A B 2 phase 2 count tf i 1 1 p p mot OMN The counting direction can be checked with M8251 to M8255 P B phase LP Ly ON Down counting Up counting Down counting OFF Up counting 10 2 2 High speed counter device notations The input terminal assignments for FX3s PLC high speed counters can be switched when used in combination with a special auxiliary relay This section classifies these high speed counter devices under the following notations Note that an OP input cannot be programmed Switched device numbers C248 OP C253 OP Standard device numbers C248 C253 10 2 3 Cautions in connecting mating device Encoders with the output forms in the following table can be connected to the input terminals The encoders may not function corr
182. ng program reading and monitoring at high speed 12 Mbps with a personal computer that supports USB 1 Supported programming tools GX Works2 GX Developer 2 In programming tools not supporting USB Communication is performed via RS 422 or RS 232C 2 RS 422 RS 232C communication The FX3s PLC can write and read programs and perform monitoring at 115 2 kbps through RS 422 RS 232C communication 1 115 2 kbps supported programming tools GX Works2 GX Developer FX 30P 2 115 2 kbps supported interfaces Standard built in port RS 422 or expansion board FX3G 422 BD for RS 422 When the RS 232C RS 422 converter FX 232AWC H is connected Expansion board FX3G 232 BD for RS 232C Special adapter FX3U 232ADP MB for RS 232C 3 In programming tools not supporting 115 2 kbps Communication is executed at 9 600 or 19 200 bps 1 When the currently used programming tool does not support the FX3s PLC use a programming tool which allows selection of the FX3G PLC as the alternative model 5 2 4 Cautions on connecting peripheral equipment by way of expansion board or special adapter When connecting peripheral equipment programming tool or GOT CPU direct connection by way of the FX3G 232 BD FX3G 422 BD or FX3U 232ADP MB set as follows If the setting is not specified with the status below communication error may occur in the connected peripheral equipment For details refer to the Data Communication Edition Set to
183. ng the installation of the product always consult a professional electrical engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards If in doubt about the operation or use please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Since the examples indicated by this manual technical bulletin catalog etc are used as a reference please use it after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system Mitsubishi Electric will accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples This manual content specification etc may be changed without a notice for improvement The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however if you have noticed a doubtful point a doubtful error etc please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Registration Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Phillips is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company The company name and the product name to be described in this manual are the registered trademarks or trademarks of each company FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents Table of Contents SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
184. nit az Proceed to the step 3 when using the DC power type main unit 6 Attach the connector cover provided on EL the DC power type connector D in the 23 Ss right figure to the AC power type connector E in the right figure Connect the connector conversion adapter main body to the connector F in the follow figure provided on the connector conversion adapter board as shown in the follow figure S28 In the case of AC power type main unit In the case of DC power type main unit i 5 oe 59 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 5 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 7 5 4 Fix the connector conversion adapter main body to the main unit with M3 tapping screws G in the follow figure supplied as accessories of the connector conversion adapter e Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem Caution Mounting holes to be used vary depending on the power type of the main unit Make sure to connect the connector conversion adapter main body using the proper mounting holes The main unit may be damaged if the proper mounting holes are not used In the case of AC power type main unit In the case of DC power type main unit Connecting method C connection of special adapter This subsection explains how to connect the special adapter to the main unit When connecting the special adapter it is necess
185. nput The counter mae resets immediately when X001 turns on Down count Up count oo e The counters C235 to C245 switch to the down count or up Pie Sonne tse count mode by turning on or off M8235 to M8245 Count input External reset External start input input Main unit Example of operation The above counter C235 operates as shown below X010 Up count Down count Up count X011 Reset input f X012 Start input X000 Count input 1 5 4 A Current 4 value 0 0 R 1 When output has 4 A operated T r Er 5 af 3 7 C235 output contact 88 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 5 Handling of High speed Counters 10 5 2 1 C235 is set to the up count or down count mode through interruption by the count input X000 When the current value increases from 6 to 5 the output contact is set and when the value decreases from 5 to 6 it is reset The current value increases and decreases regardless of the operation of the output contact However when the counter s value increments from 2 147 483 647 it changes to 2 147 483 648 In the same manner when it decrements from 2 147 483 648 it changes to 2 147 483 647 This type of counter is called a ring counter When RST instruction is executed after the reset input X011 turns on the current counter s value resets to 0 and the output contact is restored The current
186. nstruction FNC 52 This section gives examples of wiring for capturing the ON OFF status of 24 switches to M30 to M37 M40 to M47 and M50 to M57 using MTR instruction FNC 52 Example of program aa C2 o2 EE gE paw woe eo e ain Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring O T N 9p lt T LO lt e MN 0 1A50V LO lo VIO LO lo VO ILO diode is s 3 3 y 3 3 3 3 necessary X001VX002VX003VX004VX005VX006VX007 O w N 90 lt T LO O N lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 AN X001VX002VX003VX004VX005VX006VX007 O w N 9p vt LO O N oe oe oe oe oe oe 9P oe S e je j e Main unit Example FX3S 30MT ES er Connect pull up resistors 33 kQ 0 5 W when using inputs X000 to X017 2 In the case of source wiring 9 tT LO N LO O N diode is s1 y y y y 3 y necessary X001 VX002 VX003 VX004 VX005 VX006 VX007 O N t lt lt lt lt lt X001 VX002 VX003 VX004 VX005 VX006 VX007 1 3 44 M45 M46 N oD t LO O oO Se Se ae Se o SE Se Main unit Example FX3S 30MT ESS Connect pull down resistors 3 3 kQ 0 5 W when using inputs X000 to X017 121 Bojeuy ul jing O amp f Q Jo Bun M s sSN SNOEN aN Bunoousejqnou QOUBUSIUIE uny SOL _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ 1940 s uoisue p sseg KJOW N 0008d 0008W
187. nt value of a high speed counter the following two methods are available 1 Use of comparison instruction CMP instruction band comparison instruction ZCP instruction or contact comparison instruction Use the comparison instruction CMP instruction band comparison instruction ZCP instruction or contact comparison instruction if the comparison result is necessary at counting Use these instructions only when high speed processing is not required because these instructions are processed in the operation cycle of the PLC and operation delay is generated before the comparison output result is obtained Use the comparison instructions for high speed counters HSCS instruction HSCR instruction and HSZ instruction described below if it is necessary to execute comparison and change the output contact Y at the same time when the current values of high speed counters change 2 Use of Comparison instruction for high speed counters HSCS instruction HSCR instruction HSZ instruction Comparison instructions for high speed counters HSCS instruction HSCR instruction and HSZ instruction perform comparison and output the comparison results with the relevant high speed counting operation These instructions have limitations on the number of simultaneously driven instructions as shown in the following table When the output relay Y has been designated for comparison results the ON OFF status of the output is affected directly until the END instructio
188. ntains explanations for the external dimensions and terminal layout functions such as communication Chapter 15 For details refer to the manual for each extension device control and analog 3 Optional products Chapter 16 This chapter contains explanations of the specifications for the memory cassette and i Chapter 16 the installation procedures Memory cassette 4 Others Appendix A to Appendix C This chapter contains an explanation list of the special auxiliary relays M8000 to List of special devices M8511 and special data registers D8000 to D8511 Appendix A For details refer to the programming manual This chapter contains an explanation list of the basic instructions and applied List of instructions Appendix B instructions For details refer to the programming manual betor deconined model Hts ea MELSEC F Series PLC models and programming tools described in Appendix C 12 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals 1 1 2 Manual organization and position of this manual uononpou This manual describes detail on the hardware including the system configuration installation and wiring The instructions communication control analog control and positioning control are explained in separate manuals Refer to the manuals as needed Pa STS Manual for each use Separate volume NO yo Refer to the
189. nual and GX Works2 as shown in the following table D This manual GX Works2 amp PLC hardware error PLC Hardware Error PLC PP communication error PLC PP Communication Error 1 2 Serial communication error 1 ch1 Link Error O Parameter error Parameter Error Syntax error Syntax Error Circuit error Ladder Error 5 Operation error Operation Error 1 3 USB communication error USB communication error Special parameter error Special Parameter Error S a cS wn P uny SOL sgueu zuleN Buooys jqnosj _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ JOO s uoisue p sseg KJOW N 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ S8dIAeq eloads p gt sj pow penuljuoosiq 133 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes 14 6 3 Error Code List and Action When a program error occurs in the PLC the error code is stored in special data registers D8061 to D8067 D8487 and D8489 Take action based on the following information PLC Error operation Contents of error code at error occurrence PLC hardware error M8061 D8061 6101 Memory access error Stops operation 6105 Watchdog timer error PLC PP communication error M8062 D8062 Zae 6230 Memory access error Serial communication error 1 M8063 D8063 6312 Continues Para
190. o may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any connection cable Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices expansion boards special adapters and memory cassette oO DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION e Please contact a certified electronic waste disposal company for the environmentally safe recycling and disposal of your device 6 TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION After transportation verify the operations of the PLC The PLC is a precision instrument During transportation avoid impacts larger than those specified in the general specifications Section 4 1 Failure to do so may cause failures in the PLC 124 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Manual revision Bo 9 2013 Foreword This manual contains text diagrams and explanations which will guide the reader in the correct installation safe use and operation of the FX3S Series Programmable Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit And store this man
191. oltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line 2 Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the rated voltage current and frequency of each terminal The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the
192. on uononpou 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures N DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents S WEN Hed pue sounjee4 OO 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements 5 0 such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower 38 positioning limits Sa 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off 5 Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case 4 3 If an overload of the 24 V DC service power supply occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off D External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case 8 4 Note that when an error occurs in a relay or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accident
193. on ENET ADP User s Manual Description Generic name for FX3S Series PLCs Generic name for FX3G Series PLCs Generic name for FX3U Series PLCs Abbreviation of FX3S Series PLC main units Generic name for the following models FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2EYT BD FX3G 232 BD FX3G 422 BD FX3G 485 BD FX3G 485 BD RuJ FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 1DA BD FX3G 8AV BD Generic name for communication special adapters and analog special adapters Generic name for the following models FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U ENET ADP Generic name for the following models FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 3A ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP Generic name for the following model FX3G EEPROM 32L Generic name for programming software handy programming panel HPP and indicator Generic name for programming software and handy programming panel HPP Generic name for GX Works2 and GX Developer Abbreviation of programming software package SWLIDNC GXW2 E Abbreviation of programming software package SWLID5C GPPW E Generic name for the following model FX 30P Generic name for the following model FX 232AWC H Abbreviation of FX 485PC IF Generic name for GT16 GT15 GT14 GT11 and GT10 Generic name for GOT A900 Series and GOT F900 Series Generic name for GOT A900 Series Generic name for GOT F900 Series Abbreviation of FX3S Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Abbreviation of FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series Pro
194. on bO b1 a Description of error The input analog value voltage value is outside the specified range The input voltage value is over the specified upper limit of 10 2 V b Remedy Check that the input analog value is within the specified range Also check the wiring 105 Bojeuy ur ying Buum ndino NS 40 buum OO s sN SNOEN Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny S L _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ 194 O s uoisue p sseg KJOW N 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ saoinaq jeloeds sj pow penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of Built in Analog User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 3 Built in analog input function 2 EEPROM error b4 a Description of error The adjustment data which was set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out properly or has been destroyed b Remedy Please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative 3 Averaging time setting error b5 a Description of error The averaging time set for one of the channels channels 1 to 2 is outside the specified range 1 to 4095 b Remedy Check that the averaging time is set correctly for each channel 106 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 Output Wiring Procedures DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to
195. on or off is 1 3 shown in the following table lt Output number Load current 5S 5 to 24 V DC When using an instruction related to pulse train output or positioning i make sure to set the load current to 10 to 100 mA 5 to 24 V DC Y002 to Y015 24 V DC 200 mA or more The transistor OFF time is longer under lighter loads For example under a load of 24 V DC 40 mA wh Ja Ten the response time is approx 0 3 ms When response performance is required under light loads Este provide a dummy resistor as shown below to increase the load current B E e Sink output type e Source output type 2 2 Main unit Qi Dummy resistance il resistance Fuse Load Fuse Load suo do pue sun XZ JOO s uoisue p sseg KJOW N 6 Output current The maximum resistance loads for the main unit is shown in the following table The ON voltage of the output transistor is approx 1 5 V When driving a semiconductor element carefully check the input voltage characteristics of the applied element Output Limitation current The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value 0 5 A point 1 point common 0 5 A or less 4 points common 0 8 A or less 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ saoineq eID dS 7 Open circuit leakage current 0 1 mA or less sj pow penuljuoosiq 113 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 12 Outpu
196. on alarm set value Set value lt 0 Check whether the target setting contents are correct 3 Z D lt Auto tuning is finished gt PID operation is started gt Z e The deviation at start of auto tuning is 150 or less 6750 lt Step response method gt e The deviation at end of auto tuning is 1 3 or more of the 1 5 Improper auto tuning result deviation at start of auto tuning Check the measured value and target value and then execute S z auto tuning again S o lt Auto tuning is forcibly finished PID operation is not os Continues started gt a operation The operation direction estimated from the measured value at 6751 lt Step response method gt the start of auto tuning was different from the actual operation 4 6 Auto tuning operation direction mismatch direction of the output during auto tuning Correct the relationship among the target value output value oz for auto tuning and the measured value and then execute n z auto tuning again zE lt Auto tuning is finished gt PID operation is not started gt Because the set value was fluctuated during auto tuning auto lt Step response method gt tuning was not executed correctly 6752 ater Improper auto tuning result Set the sampling time to a value larger than the output change A cycle or set a larger value for the input filter constant After changing the setting execute auto tuning again o lt Limit cycle method gt SS 6753 i ae o o o O Auto tunin
197. one Stops OSES MAMUD DUE Or alah eee Counter pubis eee During programming each instruction is checked If a syntax more than once operation error is detected modify the instruction correctly 6505 Device number is out of allowed range 6506 Invalid instruction 6507 Invalid label number P 6508 Invalid interrupt input I 6510 MC nesting number error Circuit error M8066 D8066 6610 LD LDI is continuously used 9 times or more 6611 More ANB ORB instructions than LD LDI instructions 6612 Less ANB ORB instructions than LD LDI instructions 6613 MPS is continuously used 12 times or more 6614 No MPS instruction 6615 No MPP instruction This error occurs when a combination of instructions is Stops No coil belween MPS MRD and MPP or incorrect incorrect in the entire circuit block or when the relationship 6616 aseran leombration between a pair of instructions is incorrect P Modify the instructions in the program mode so that their Instruction below is not connected to bus line mutual relationship becomes correct 6617 STL RET MCR P I DI El FOR NEXT SRET IRET FEND or END STL MC or MCR can be used only in main program but it is 6618 nie used elsewhere e g in interrupt routine or subroutine 6619 Invalid instruction is used in FOR NEXT loop STL RET MC MCR I interrupt pointer or IRET 135 Bojeuy ul jing Buum ndino NS h Jo buum OO S F O 77 D a7 uny S L B
198. onnector European type Terminal Layout LEDs correspond to each output terminal S S x BYO By n an a Ld 5 poles 145 Bojeuy ul jing Buum ndino NS 10 Buum OO s sN SNOEN Ja sgueu zuleN uny SOL O E e 4 nN O r Q xg JBI s uoisue p sseg KJOW N 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ saoinaq jeloeds sj pow penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Prog rammable Controllers 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 2 Expansion Board 15 2 3 FX3G 232 BD External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 20 g 0 05 Ibs e Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board 2 Side cover x Manual supplied with N product e Connector RS 232C D SUB 9 pin male 12 35 1 38 5 2 0 21 0 48 Pin configuration CD DCD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG GND DR DSR Not used Not used Not used 123 45 O O O OO O O O 0 6 789 O ooNnNOoQoG RA ON 15 2 4 FX3G 422 BD External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 20 g 0 05 Ibs e Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board Side cover Manual supplied with product e Connector RS 422 MINI DIN 8 pin female 146 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 15 Other
199. ontrollers 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 2 Cable Connecting Procedures 8 2 4 Grounding terminal of the FX3v ENET ADP The grounding terminal of the FX3U ENET ADP is a M2 5 screw UOI ONPO U 1 Applicable cables NO Electric wire size 0 5 to 1 5 mm AWG 20 to 16 2 Treatment of electric wire ends SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 e When using a stranded cable or solid cable as it is Twist the end of the stranded cable so that loose wires will not stick out Do not solder plate the end of the cable OO ay 38 3A Approx 8 mm 0 31 4 g 3 Tightening torque D Set the tightening torque to 0 4 to 0 5 Nem 8 Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Caution 5 When tightening a grounding terminal use a screwdriver suitable for the terminal screw The screwdriver Soo a a a a gt which does not suit the thread groove is used tightening torque will not be able to be achieved To achieve 83S the appropriate tightening torque shown in the above use the following screwdriver or an appropriate a replacement lt Reference gt 6 ox Weidmuller Interface GmbH amp Co KG SDIK PHO 9008560000 2s Weidmuller Interface GmbH amp Co KG SD 0 6x3 5x100 9008330000 a uoneleysuy i 1 T a gt WD se D D O s13 UN09 69
200. onversion adapter is used together 153 1A REMOVA Meee eee ori ce ade ee ie ream ee cee ee ee ee ee eee 155 16 4 1 Removal when the expansion board connector conversion adapter are not used together 155 16 4 2 Removal when the expansion board connector conversion adapter are used together 156 16 5 Saved Data COMO AE reisinin ii Aa Ea S T a AR 157 100 PROTECTS Witch sereias aA a A A 158 10 6 1 PROTECT SWIC SEINO estr a a e a es 158 16 6 2 PROTEGT SWItCNODErSON nesana a a alee 158 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 16 6 3 Precautions when setting and USING the SWItCN cccceccccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeesnaeees 158 16 7 Memory Cassette lt gt PLC EEPROM Memory Transfers by Loader Function 005 159 16 7 1 Writing WR FX3G EEPROM 32L gt PLOC cccccccecccceseececeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeseeeeesseeeessneeeesaees 159 16 7 2 Reading RD FX3G EERROM 32L lt PEC 23ers EE 160 16 8 Memory cassette precautions fOr USC cccccccccceeceseseeceeeeeceueeceeeeceeessseeseueesseseesegeesseseeses 160 Appendix A Special Device List 161 Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 cee eeccceeceeeeeee esse eeeeeeseeeeaees 161 Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 cece cece seeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeaees 167 Appendix A 3 Analog expansion boards M8260 to M8269 and
201. or Action lt Auto tuning is finished KP 32767 gt PID operation is started gt The variation of the measured value PV is small compared with the output value Multiply the measured value PV by 10 so that the variation of the measured value will increase during auto tuning lt Limit cycle method gt 6757 Auto tuning result exceeds proportional gain KP outside range from 0 to 32767 lt Limit cycle method gt lt Auto tuning is finished KP 32767 gt PID operation is 6758 Auto tuning result exceeds integral time started gt Tl outside range from 0 to 32767 The auto tuning time is longer than necessary Increase the difference ULV LLV between the upper limit lt Limit cycle method gt and lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set a 6759 Auto tuning result exceeds derivative time smaller value to the input filter constant a or set a smaller TD outside range from 0 to 32767 value to the PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning and then check the result for improvement 6760 ABS Ania read ion Seno sume necator Check servo wiring and parameter setting Also check ABS instruction 6762 Continues Port specified by inverter communication instruction is already Check to make sure the port is not specified by another operation used in another communication instruction Check to make sure the input X as specified by DSZR or ZRN instruction is not being used for the following purposes
202. or on USB Mini B connector USB Mini B plug 14 1 4 Writing of program and program check power ON and PLC stopped Turn on the PLC power Make sure that the RUN STOP switch of the PLC is set to STOP and turn the power on Check the program Check for circuit errors and grammatical errors with the program check function of the programming tool Transfer the sequence program Write the program to the PLC with the programming tool PROTECT switch When the memory cassette is used enl T Make sure to set the PROTECT switch of the memory cassette to OFF a shown right E eed For details on the memory cassette refer to Chapter 16 TE O a i Verify the sequence program Verify that the program has been correctly written to the PLC Execute PLC diagnosis Check for errors in the PLC main body with the PLC diagnostic function of the programming tool For details on the PLC diagnosis with GX Works2 refer to Section 14 6 For details on the PLC diagnosis with FX 30P refer to FX 30P operation Manual 126 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON 14 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON
203. orks2 Untitled Project PRG Write MAIN 1 Step mE Project Edit Find Replace Compile View Online Debug Diagnostics Tool Window Help P Xx ajo A aana eoms Jae ER PRENENT RES i vi aan ER AE ee i alas 2p SS S SP EET Navigation j CC IE Control Diagnostics oe ra CC IE Field Diagnostics Project ne lt MELSECNET Di CC Link Diagnostic s END E 3 Check the results of diagnosis Display the following window to check the errors Example one error occurs PLC Diagnostics m Connection Channel List Serial Port PLC Module Connection RS 232C System Image Error Information Open the help window of emro Erorhep GX Works2 to check the eee ee error details Status No Error Step Current Error Year MonthiDay Time a j The error in PLC A 640 Parameter Error 2011 11 29 11 48 14 Major Error s A Moderate Error is displayed A Som I Change the window size and position after error jump The LED status PLC Panel Monitor Status TET of PLC is dispvlaved LED Status Monitoring i i PLC Information 3 Remote STOP RUN Memory Type Ram Clear PLC Memory C ERROR CPU Version 1 00 Set Clock Stop Monitor Close 132 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes 14 6 2 Representation of errors D Errors are represented in this ma
204. ormally open contacts Other Instruction 5 ORI Parallel connection of NC normally closed contacts NOP No operation or null step E 3 ORP Parallel connection of Rising edge pulse End Instruction 8 8 ORF Parallel connection of Falling trailing edge pulse END Program END I O refresh and Return to Step 0 _ Qi Connection Instruction ANB Serial connection of multiple parallel circuits Oco ORB Parallel connection of multiple contact circuits 3 5 D MPS Stores the current result of the internal PLC operations ax MRD Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations D MPP Pops recalls and removes the currently stored result j INV Invert the current result of the internal PLC operations 1 6 MEP Conversion of operation result to leading edge pulse Q z MEF Conversion of operation result to trailing edge pulse ae gt Appendix B 2 Step Ladder Instructions sy So Mnemonic Function S 3 STL Starts step ladder _ RET Completes step ladder S17 UONONSUy sj pow penuljuoosiq 175 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers Appendix B Instruction List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number Appendix B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number FNC No Mnemonic Function FNC No Mnemonic Function Program Flow Data Operation 00 Conditional Jump 40 Zone Reset 01 Call Subroutine 41 Decode 02 Subroutine Return 42 Enco
205. orter screws Do not use M3 x 16 longer screws removed in the step 2 because they may damage the main unit 156 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 5 Saved Data Content 16 5 Saved Data Content The following data is saved on the memory cassette Item Parameters Sequence programs Description Memory capacity setting Memory capacity 2 k 4 k 16 k steps Comment capacity File register capacity Modem initializing settings RUN terminal settings RS RS2 instructions computer link inverter communication function communication settings Special parameters User created sequence programs Max 4 000 steps Comments and file registers can be created in the Comments MaX 11209 polls memory by setting them in the parameter memor 0 to 24 blocks 1 block 50 points 500 steps ry y g p y capacity Pie paniciers Max 2 000 points g 0 to 4 blocks 1 block 500 points 500 steps 157 W gt o O Q O O Q ss os F Q cE op op wh Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny S L _ Qi suo do pue sun uoisu x4 JOUIO 0008d 0008W wn O 49 O D o lt O 49 Mn 5 n F 5S O g O wn oe sj pow penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 6 PROTECT Switch 16 6 PROTECT Switch 16 6 1 PROTE
206. ose input terminal or peripheral device Built in Variable analog potentiometers except FX3S 30MLI ELI 2AD The PLC has two built in variable analog potentiometers available for adjusting the timer set time Up to 8 points can be added by using the optional analog potentiometer expansion board Built in analog inputs only FX3S 30MLI ELJ 2AD The PLC has two built in analog inputs available for voltage input Additional analog input points can be added by using an optional expansion board or special adapter Writing during RUN The programming software for personal computer enables you to modify the program while the PLC is running Built in clock function The PLC has a clock function to control the time Programming tool Use a version of a programming tool supporting the FX3s Refer to Chapter 5 Remote debugging of program Programming software enables you to remotely transfer programs and monitor PLC operation through a modem connected to the RS 232C expansion board or the RS 232C communication special adapter 2 Input output high speed processing functions of main unit High speed counter function 1 phase 60 kHz x 2 points 10 kHz x 4 points 2 phase 30 kHz x 1 points 5 kHz x 1 point Refer to Chapter 10 and Programming Manual Pulse catch function Signals with short ON width or OFF width can be captured without a complicated program Refer to Chapter 9 and Programming Man
207. ount input counters 2 High speed counter type High speed counter No Monitoring device COFF O ON C246 M8246 5 C247 M8247 Soo p U 1 phase 2 count input C248 M8248 H o C249 M8249 25 C250 M8250 Up counting Down counting C251 M8251 C252 M8252 6 2 phase 2 count input C253 M8253 oS C254 M8254 as C255 M8255 gt 3 For switching high speed counter function 7 A A i M8388 Contaci Tor changing high peed Colmer Changes the function of high speed counter s function 2 O M8392 Function switching devices Switches the function of C248 and C253 Subsection 10 9 2 K FF 2g O 59 HE z a 95 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 10 Cautions on Use 10 9 2 Function switching switching of allocation and functions of input terminals When the counters C248 and C253 are combined with the auxiliary relays M8388 the allocation of the input terminals and functions are changed Program the special auxiliary relays just before the counters High speed counter type Function switching method Details of change M8388 gt C248 OP Reset input is not given oe T KOOO P M8388 esd C253 OP Reset input is not given OP cass 000 p g 10 10 Cautions on Use For programming details refer to the Programming Manual e Ifthe operation of a high speed counter is triggered by a device such as a switch the counter may malfunction due to extra
208. oute and installation location Fit a noise filter onto the power supply line 3 Ifthe ERR LED does not go off even after the measures stated in 1 and 2 are taken consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative suondo pue sun XZ JOO s uoisue p sseg KJOW N 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ S8dIAeq eloads p gt One of the following errors has occurred in the PLC Flashing Parameter error e Syntax error e Ladder error Perform PLC diagnosis and program check with the programming tool For the remedies refer to Section 14 6 30 If the operations of the PLC are abnormal perform PLC diagnosis and a3 Off No errors that stop the PLC have occurred program check with the programming tool n gt A Serial communication error or Operation error may have occurred oO 131 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes Error codes can be checked with the programming tool 14 6 1 Operation and check by GX Works2 1 Connect the personal computer and the PLC 2 Execute the PLC diagnosis Click Diagnostics PLC Diagnostics on the menu bar and the diagnosis of PLC will start E MELSOFT Series GX W
209. ov YO Yi Y2 Y4 COM3 Y7 Yu yi2 Y14 MR ES 24V COMO COM1 COM2 Y3 Y5 Y6 Y10 COM4 Y13 YIS LOT 134 11 2 2 Applicable PLC The following models have built in variable analog potentiometers Applicable PLC 11 2 3 Special data register The current value of each variable analog potentiometer is stored in special data registers shown below Variable analog potentiometer Data register to store current value VR1 Upper side Variable analog potentiometer 1 D8030 Integer from 0 to 255 VR2 Lower side Variable analog potentiometer 2 D8031 Integer from 0 to 255 98 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of Built in Analog User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 2 Built in variable analog potentiometer function 11 2 4 Use example of variable analog potentiometer 1 Example 1 The current value of VR1 is used as the set value of a timer TO Boyeuy ul yIng D8030 The current value of VR1 is used as the set value of the timer TO 2 T gt The setting range in this example using TO 100 ms timer in from 0 to 25 5 sec E 2 Example 2 The current value of VR2 multiplied by 10 is used as the set value of a timer T1 1 3 M8000 SS eg D8031 Ko DO D1 The value of D8031 is multiplied by 10 and stored in oS RUN monitor DO D1 aS DO seeeeeeeeeccceceeeeeeeee The current value of VR2 multiplied by 10 is used as the C 1 gt set value
210. pleted when the WR LED goes off After turning the PLC power OFF remove the memory cassette from the PLC Refer to Section 16 4 for the removal procedure 159 Bojeuy ul jing Buum nding N 10 Buum OO s sN SNOEN Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny SOL _ Qi OOO 225 ouv 5 a L m az D 5 n O Asowey ajjesse9 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ saoinaq jeloeds sj pow penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 8 Memory cassette precautions for use 16 7 2 Reading RD FX3G EEPROM 32L lt PLC Programs are read from the PLC s internal RAM memory to the memory cassette Required condition The PLC must be stopped and the PROTECT switch must be OFF Install the memory cassette on the main unit Set the PROTECT switch to OFF Refer to Section 16 3 for the installation procedure e Verify that the PLC power is OFF then install the memory cassette on the PLC e Turn the PLC power ON e Raise the memory cassette s eject lever MITSUBISHI Press the RD key 1 time kge RD LED 0O The RD LED lights and a preparation status is established RD key TS Jo e To cancel press the WR key 3 7 Press the RD key again Reading is executed and the RD LED blinks e It takes seve
211. ply the power to the PLC for 30 minutes or more to completely charge this large capacity capacitor The capacitor works for 10 days atmosphere 25 C Can be set as file registers in units of Max 2000 points 500 points from D1000 in the program area EEPROM using parameters Constant Hexadecimal number 34 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 6 External Dimensions Weight Accessories Installation 4 6 External Dimensions Weight Accessories Installation uononpou The external dimensions of the main unit are explained 4 6 1 Main units N 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 OO ONpod 5 re as O 5 wD oO amp O 2 O i D amp O me N Se N e0 C Y W1 Mounting hole pitches 75 2 96 AC power type a 49 1 93 DC power type Q 3 W1 mm inches i gt Series W mm inches Direct mounting hole pitches MASS Weight kg Ibs FX3S 10MR ES 5 FX3S 10MT ES 0 30 0 66 Ibs ae FX3S 10MT ESS ag FX3S 10MO 60 2 37 52 2 05 aiso FX3S 10MR DS PR FX3S 10MT DS 0 22 0 48 Ibs Ta FX3S 10MT DSS FX3S 14MR ES 6 FX3S 14MT ES 0 30 0 66 Ibs B FX3S 14MT
212. points or less Extension is impossible oy output points Output points 14 points or less Extension is impossible 2 gS Input relay X000 to X017 a Input output relay The device numbers are octal Bat Y0OOO to Y015 MO to M383 384 points M384 to M511 128 points Output relay For general P EEPROM keep Auxiliary relay wasis For general M512 to M1535 1024 points Q For special M8000 to M8511 512 points peA A S0 to S9 10 points 3 iate EEPROM keep S10 to 127 118 points For general 128 to S255 128 points 7 100 ms TO to T31 0 1 to 3 276 7 sec 0 1 to 3 276 7 sec 0 01 to 327 67 sec a 100 ms 10 ms T32 to T62 31 points When M8028 is driven ON timers T32 to TRET T62 31 points are changed to 10 ms resolution T63 to T127 65 points 0 001 to 32 767 sec T128 to T131 0 001 to 32 767 sec on delay timer 1 ms oo 1 ms accumulating type 100 ms accumulating type T132 to T137 0 1 to 3 276 7 sec AY F Available as analog timers a 3i Variable analog potentiometers VR1 D8030 VR2 D8031 z O For compatible PLCs refer to Chapter 11 a z Available as voltage inputs Analog inputs ch1 D8270 ch2 D8271 9 For compatible PLCs refer to Chapter 11 3 CO to C15 Counting from 0 to 32 767 ae 16 bits up EEPROM keep __ C16 to C31 Counting from 0 to 32 767 2 Counting from 2 147 483 648 to 32 bits up down For general C200 to C234 35 points 2 147 483 647 uH s13 UN09 peeds 33
213. put display LED lights Source input When a no voltage contact or PNP open collector transistor output is connected between an input X terminal and the 24V terminal and the circuit is closed the input X turns on Then the input display LED lights Input impedance RUN terminal setting X000 to X017 up to the largest input number in the main unit of the main unit can be used as RUN input terminals by setting parameters 1 X000 to X005 in the FX3s 10MLJ main unit X000 to X007 in the FX3s 14ML1 main unit and X000 to X013 in the FX3S 20ML main unit For the functions of the RUN terminals refer to Subsection 14 2 1 2 Input circuit Function of input circuit The primary and secondary circuits for input are insulated with a photocoupler and the second circuit is provided with a C R filter The C R filter is designed to prevent malfunctions caused by chattering of the input contact and noise from the input line There is a delay of approx 10 ms in response to input switching from ON to OFF and from OFF to ON Change of filter time X000 to X017 have digital filters and the filter time can be changed in increments of 1 ms in the range from 0 to 15 ms through special data register D8020 When 0 is specified for the time the input filter values are set as shown in the following table Input number Input filter value when 0 is specified X000 X001 10 us X002 to X007 50 us X010 to X017 200 us 76 FX
214. r FX3G 232 BD ew FX3U 232ADP MB RS 422 cable 15m D SUB 25 Pin lt gt MINI DIN 8 Pin FX 422CAB0 PA zaam For connection between RS 232C RS 422 converter and FX3S programming port RS 422 a FX3G 422 BD 1 5m MINI DIN 8 Pin lt gt MINI DIN 8 Pin FX 20P CABO 3 411 For connection between FX 30P and FX3S programming port RS 422 FX3G 422 BD 1 The following USB cables are applicable Model name Description MR J3USBCBL3M USB cable 3 m 9 10 GT09 C30USB 5P USB cable to transfer personal computer data USB A plug 3 m 9 10 3 2 3 Converters and interface Model name Description RS 232C RS 422 converters RS 232C RS 422 converter Communication speed Applicable to 9 600 to 115 200 bps FX 232AWC H 2 2 When the programming software is not applicable to FX3s or FX3G the converter is applicable only to 9 600 or 19 200 bps 27 uononpou N U TI a D a Z D oO 3o D v nD 2 ONpold uononpou suonesyoods Aa Qi s3919 jesayd d pue uolsSJ3A wasis CD uoneinByuoy uo ejesu i oo Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Bun induy CO p 2EY usiH sJa uno9 peeds FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 1 Generic Specifications 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units This chapter explains the specif
215. r The expansion board and special adapter for a each communication function can be connected each analog function are connected S Refer to Data Communication Edition Refer to Analog Control Edition Refer to MODBUS Serial l l Communication Edition Kinds of analog functions Refer to ENET ADP User s Manual Voltage current input on 2 Kinds of communication functions e Voltage current output Eg e Programming communication e Temperature sensor input thermocouple and 33 RS 232C RS 422 USB platinum resistance thermometer sensor e N N Network OO e Parallel link 37 e Computer link ge e Inverter communication j e Non protocol communication RS 232C RS 485 4 e MODBUS communication D e Ethernet 8 Qi s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJS w js s uoneinByuoy uo ejesu i oo Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Bun induy CO p h s19 UN0J peeds ubiIH 19 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 2 Features and Part Names User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts 2 2 1 Front Panel Factory default configuration standard 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 2 Top cover Terminal names Terminal block covers Input display LEDs red Peripheral device connecting connector cover Operation status display LEDs Output display LEDs red The year and mon
216. raged data data average conforming to the specified averaging time will be stored in the above data registers as the input data The special data registers that store the input data are shown in the following table Special data register Description D8270 Channel 1 input data D8271 Channel 2 input data Caution regarding input data Input data is for reading only Do not change rewrite the input data using sequence program indicator or device monitor of the programming tool FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of Built in Analog User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 3 Built in analog input function 2 Averaging time If the averaging time is set in the PLC the averaged data will be stored as the input data The averaging time can be set for each channel Set the averaging time in the following special data registers Bojeuy ul yIng Special data register Description 1 2 D8274 Averaging time for channel 1 D8275 Averaging time for channel 2 5 Cautions regarding averaging time setting e Ifthe averaging time is set to 1 the immediate data is stored to the special data register e Ifthe averaging time is set in the range from 2 to 4095 the average value will be calculated to conform to 1 3 the set averaging time and the average value obtained will be stored in the special data register lt lt e After turning the PLC power on the current data is stored to special data registers until the number of data oS ite
217. ral seconds to read data from the built in EEPROM The RD LED flickers while data is read Remove the memory cassette from the main unit Reading is completed when the RD LED goes off After turning the PLC power OFF remove the memory cassette from the PLC then turn the PROTECT switch ON Refer to Section 16 4 for the removal procedure 16 8 Memory cassette precautions for use Tapping screws provided for fixing the memory cassette Two types of longer and shorter M3 tapping screws are packed together with the memory cassette Read carefully the installation method described in Section 16 3 and use the proper type Number of available units Only one memory cassette may be connected to a FX3s main units EEPROM memory writing count 10 000 writing operations are permitted at the EEPROM memory Precaution for file register D usage Writing to the flash memory occurs at each PLC operation cycle if BMOV instructions are used in a continuous execution format with regard to a file register To prevent this be sure to use pulse execution format BMOVP instructions 160 Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition re a gt Appendix A Special Device List 5 The device numbers and functions of the special auxiliary relays indicated as special M in tables and 12 special da
218. rammable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC P Error hi operation Contents of error Action code at error gt occurrence D Operation error M8067 D8067 a lt Auto tuning is continued gt 1 2 6740 Sampling time TS lt Scan time The operation is continued in the condition sampling time TS cyclic time scan time O 6742 Variation of measured value exceeds limit z APV lt 32768 or 32767 lt APV eae Deviation exceeds limit 2 EV lt 32768 or 32767 lt EV 6744 Integral result exceeds limit lt PID operation is continued gt 1 3 Outside range from 32768 to 32767 The operation is continued with each parameter set to the 6745 Derivative value exceeds limit due to derivative gain KD maximum or minimum value S OD Derivative result exceeds limit oS 6746 co Outside range from 32768 to 32767 D T 6747 PID operation result exceeds limit Outside range from 32768 to 32767 z ae EE PID output upper limit set value lt PID output lower limit set transpose o PUp PESI Tai Na Renan Oot a alt 6748 valde value PID operation is continued gt Check whether the target setting contents are correct S 2 P O at 6749 Abnormal PID input variation alarm set value or output lt Alarm output is not given gt PID operation is continued gt gS variati
219. rber 7 Open circuit leakage current ag When the output contact is turned off no current leaks d 1 250 V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards z3 2 UL and cUL standards approved at 120 and 240 V AC 109 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type 12 1 3 External wiring precautions 1 Protection circuit for load short circuiting A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output Main unit 2 Contact protection circuit for inductive loads An internal protection circuit for the relays is not provided for the relay output circuit in this product It is recommended to use inductive loads with built in protection circuits When using loads without built in protection circuits insert an external contact protection circuit etc to reduce noise and extend the product life 1 DC circuit Connect a diode in parallel with the load The diode for commutation must comply with the following specifications Inductive load Guide PLC output contact Diode for commutation Item Reverse voltage 5 to 10 times the load voltage Forward current Load current or more 2 AC circuit Connect the surge absorber combined CR components such as a s
220. rce output common Output to make load current flow out of the output Y terminal is called source output supply 12 2 2 Handling of transistor output 1 Output terminals One common terminal is used for 1 or 4 transistor output points Sink output Connect each COMU number terminal to the minus side of the load power supply The COMU terminals are not connected internally Sink output type DC power Supply Main unit Source output Connect each V number terminal to the plus side of the load power supply The VLJ terminals are not connected internally L T E wee Fuse DC power supply 112 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 2 External power supply For driving the load use a smoothing power supply of 5 to 30 V DC that can output current two or more times the rated current of the fuse connected to the load circuit u T 5 gt 5 v O Ce 3 Insulation of circuit The internal circuit of the PLC and the output transistor are insulated with a photocoupler The common blocks are separated from one another 4 Display of operation When power is applied to the photocoupler the LED is lit and the output transistor is turned on Bunny yndino 5 Response time The time from when the PLC drives or shuts down the photocoupler until the transistor is turned
221. rent consumption as the power factor phase between current and voltage gets smaller the arc energy gets larger The standard life of contacts used for Inductive loads such as contactors and solenoid valves is 500 000 operations at 20 VA The following table shows the approximate life of a relay based on the results of an operation life test Test condition 1 sec ON 1 sec OFF Load capacity Contact life 0 2 A 100 V AC 20 VA 3 000 000 times 0 1 A 200 V AC 0 35 A 100 V AC 35 VA 1 000 000 times 0 17 A 200 V AC 0 8 A 100 V AC 80 VA 200 000 times 0 4 A 200 V AC The product life of relay contacts becomes considerably shorter than the above conditions when the rush overcurrent is shut down Please refer to the following measures regarding the inductive load Refer to Subsection 12 1 3 2 Some types of inductive loads generate rush current 5 to 15 times the stationary current at activation Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load 2 Lamp load Lamp loads generally generate rush current 10 to 15 times the stationary current Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load 3 Capacitive load Capacitive loads can generate rush current 20 to 40 times the stationary current Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load
222. ries Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 24 V DC input Sink and source input type 9 2 3 Examples of external wiring AC power type 1 Sink input I 2 Bor 4 Main unit Main unit es ee es ee ee 3 Three wire sensor Two wire Input proximity sensor impedance Three wire sensor Two wire proximity sensor Input impedance Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two wire proximity switch a bleeder resistance may be required In the case of sink input wiring short circuit the S S terminal and the 24V terminal of the main unit In the case of source input wiring short circuit the S S terminal and the OV terminal of the main unit The OV and 24V terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 79 UOI ONPO U NO SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 OO uononpou Np suojeoyioeds Aa Qi s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJS wasis CD uoneinByuoy uoneleysu i oo Q Fp o 2 D oe O O Ge eet lt 8 ox Bui induy SJ9 UN0D peeds ubiIH FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9
223. rminals to a torque of 0 22 to 0 25 Nem amp 3 2 Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Failure to do so may cause Ta equipment failures or malfunctions e Treatment of stranded wires and solid wires without coating ee ae dad wire sola wits 6 Twist the ends of stranded wires tightly so that loose wires will not stick aR Do not solder plate the electric wire ends 0 36 S j e Treatment using bar terminal with insulating sleeve It may be difficult to insert the electric wire into the insulating sleeve Insulating sleeve Contact area depending on the thickness of the electric wire sheath Select the electric Crimp area wire referring to the outline drawing B 1 8 mm lt Reference gt 0 32 Manufacturer Caulking tool 61 1 14 mm 0 56 3 Phoenix Contact Co Ltd AI 0 5 8WH ciao or CRIMPFOX 6T F e Bar terminal with insulating sleeve gt n gmr 2 D O 3 Old model name CRIMPFOX ZA 3 4 Old model name CRIMPFOX UD 6 4 Tool ue uolesedaid For tightening the terminal use a commercially available small screwdriver having a straight form that is not widened toward the end as shown right ire 9 Note straight tip 3 If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will not be 0 4mm 25mm able to be achieved To achieve the appropriate tightening torque shown in 0 02 i 0 1 a the table above use the follow
224. roduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication m ae RS 232C RS 422 cable Connection cabling E ee Connection cabling for extension device Peripheral device connector FX 232AWC H RS 232C EJ RS 422 MITSUBISHI RS 232C B Expansion board 4 FX3G 232 BD 4 FX3U 232ADP MB 6 FX3s CNV ADP Rs 232c E v OE i FX 232AWC H A f RS 232C J E Rs 422 FX 30P MITSUBISHI i d 5 FX3G 422 BD EJ Fx 20P caBo No Shape of connector or combination with cable No Shape of connector or combination with cable PA Fx 422caBo KI F2 232CAB 1 REPERE FX 232AWC H E Fx 232CAB 1 PA Fx 422caBo KI F2 232CAB 2 FX 232AWC H FX3G 232 BD D SUB 9 Pin RS 232C FX3U 232ADP MB D SUB 9 Pin RS 232C FX3G 422 BD MINI DIN 8 Pin RS 422 FX3S CNV ADP Half pitch 14 Pin 5 FX 232CAB 2 Expansion board connector A Fx 422caB0 Ely F2 232CAB ar FX 232AWC H F2 232CAB 1 FX 30P MINI DIN 8 Pin RS 422 B FX 20P CABO USB A connector 4 USB cable Refer to Subsection 3 2 2 Peripheral device connector RS 422 MINI DIN 8 Pin Peripheral device connector USB Mini B connector USB
225. rom Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases a Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design b Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user c When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided d Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced e Relay failure or output contact failure caused by usage beyond the specified Life of contact cycles f Failure caused by external irresistible forc
226. rovided Provided 1 When using multiple high speed counters make sure that the sum of used frequency does not exceed the overall frequency For details on the overall frequency refer to Section 10 7 86 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 4 Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers 10 4 Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers UOI ONPO U The high speed counter numbers are allocated to the input terminals X000 to X007 as shown in the following table The input terminals not allocated for high speed counters can be used as general input terminals NO 10 4 1 Allocation table U Up count input D Down count input A A phase input B B phase input R External reset input S External start input SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 Input allocation High speed counter type High speed counter No X006 X007 C235 O M C236 O BB O fe SS OO Np nee Ea p e a ee a ee E sia _ O ae El aera O S Sad E O 1 phase 2 count input an _ i sa Pwo i EEE l _ pe me See uononpou suonesyoods Aa s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJS oes _ oa i e iia ee Ps 2 2 phase 2 count input ia i cass 0P TTA oe Pe im gt _ is 1 When a special auxiliary relay is driven in a program the input terminals and their associated functions are switched wasis 6D uoneinByuoy Qi
227. s external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe 5 n machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS c AUTION Qi Soa e Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least a z Fi 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line a Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure 6 QU S D 23 z 5 n gmr o D O Bum nduy QO pue uonevedaig i uH s13 UN09 peeds 63 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition WIRING PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not supply power to the 24V terminal 24 V DC service power supply on the main unit Doing so may cause damage to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or le
228. s a cactus once atta ua Aad ancl dee dea duay louse ictione sates 147 19 20 ASG 400 6 P Rd wesc cet ta cee rcs hc e a a elec etree Sede 5 San uss Sa ad eee et accede 147 1228 FAIG ZAD BD aki re ceseshstecenet ti tutenesRiboncus saath od SeudusiatesdltnccOavecuduentestenducined albicans ic auteeboestantes agacsted 148 TLF rod DAB Sen emo eo ee a a eae te eee eee eee 148 ISAI FAS G OAN BD ena a aheo hae Gaze aoedasia a catenin EE vedic eee a natiasiaete 149 15 3 Connector Conversion ACaptel cccccccccsseeccescecseeeecesceceaeccaucecsueeeseeesseeesasessueeesaasessugeeees 150 PL FAS AV ADR ae ee a GLY Ome no Re de OE te ee 150 13 47 lite aC Sr Modil sch soca hat coat N aN sedate tecast 150 Dd ce ON ee ates ci anatase E T dalot gee ease dk EGE 150 16 Memory Cassette 151 Gal QUUM Se shat cetay it od autores E eased T E E one 151 1 2 PS CIN A OLN anaa iterates ate beard token Ren tates tna a ores rae lutarana tid 151 16 2 1 Electrical specifications 0 0 0 eeccccceeceeceeceeceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeesaeceeseseeeseeeeesseeeessaeeessaaeeeseaeseeesaaeesaaes 151 16 2 2 Part names and external dimensions cccccccssceceseecceeeccuceccuccecucecsueessueessusessaeessueessueessaeeees 151 1 9 MSTA OM td cece ectedated chet bres utorrent eth tite el amar tyr ae ater sonra lee ad at 152 16 3 1 Installation when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is not used together 152 16 3 2 Installation when the expansion board connector c
229. sed together z Removal procedure Raise the memory cassette detachment lever A in the right figure 13 ss Remove the tapping screws B in the right 5S figure which fix the memory cassette Proceed to the step 3 when the memory cassette is not fixed with tapping screws 14 S52 Grasp the detachment lever C in the right a8 figure and pull it vertically to remove the ge memory cassette 15 s Asowsy ajjesse9 Attach the top cover D in the right figure 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ saoinaq jeloeds sj pow penuljuoosiq 155 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 4 Removal 16 4 2 Removal when the expansion board connector conversion adapter are used together Removal procedure Raise the memory cassette detachment lever A in the right figure Remove the tapping screws B in the right figure which fix the memory cassette Proceed to the step 3 when the memory cassette is not fixed with tapping screws Grasp the detachment lever D in the right figure and pull it vertically to remove the memory cassette Attach the upper connector cover E in the right figure Fix the expansion board with the tapping screws F in the right figure provided for fixing the memory cassette e Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem Caution Two types of M3 tapping screws are provided Use M3x8 sh
230. ss to the grounding terminal on the main unit with a wire 2 mm or thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to Section 8 3 Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Noise resistance may be lower when the L and N wires of an AC power supply are not wired correctly Please wire using the correct polarity Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the rated voltage current and frequency of each terminal The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tig
231. strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed Notes about Examples of Wiring The examples of wiring are given under the following conditions For the example of positioning wiring refer to the Positioning Control Edition The input output numbers are the actual numbers on the program They may differ from the numbers shown on the product terminals Product input output specifications Check the product input output specifications when using any example of wiring Products for sink output and products for source output are available The examples of programming applied instructions are given based on the allocation of the input output numbers for wiring For the applied instructions refer to the Programming Manual 118 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instruction FNC 72 BIN Instruction FNC 19 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instruction FNC 72 BIN Instruction FNC 19 5 13 2 1 When DSW instruction FNC 72 is used 8 Examples of wiring for capturing values from a 4 digit digital switch to the data register D100 are given below 1 2 O Example of program 5
232. t 5 A MITSUBISHI a o 7g as MESE FXes FTE e MR ES o 8858 POE 5 LOT 134 3 i EEEIEE Bum ndu QO pue uonevedaiy CO 1 to 9 January to September X October Y November Z December Year Example 2013 Last two digit of year h s19 UN0J peeds ubiIH 39 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability 5 1 2 Version check method The PLC version number can be checked by reading the last three digits of device D8001 D8101 D8001 D8101 12 1 0 0 PLC type and L Version information Example Ver 1 00 version a PLC type Example 28 FX3s PLC 5 1 3 Version upgrade history FX3S Series performed the following upgrade Version Manufacturer s serial number Contents of version upgrade 133 Ver 1 00 March 2013 First product eee FX3S 30ML1 ELJ 2AD First product 13X Ver 1 10 October 2013 e Supports connection of following expansion boards FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2EYT BD 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability 5 2 1 Applicable versions of programming tool 1 GX Works2 GX Works2 is applicable to FX3s PLCs from the following versions FX3S PLC version Applicable GX Works2 version Ver 1 00 Ver 1 492N or later 2 FX 30P FX 30P is applicable to
233. t Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 12 2 3 External wiring precautions 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output Use a load power supply capacity that is at least 2 times larger than the fusell total rated fuse capacity 2 Contact protection circuit for inductive loads When an inductive load is connected connect a diode for commutation in parallel with the load as necessary The diode must comply with the following specifications Guide 5 to 10 times of the load voltage Item Reverse voltage Forward current Load current or more 3 Interlock For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where a hazardous condition could result if switched ON simultaneously an external interlock should be provided for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to the right Sink output type Yo00 MO Main unit Yo00 VO Main unit Sink output type Yo00 MO Main unit Source output type Inductive Yo00 Fuse V0 Main unit Sink output type Limit of normal rotation Interlock Normal rotation Inductive Reverse rotation Limit of PLC output reverse rotation element Source output typ
234. ta registers indicated as special D in tables are shown below Note that functions of certain devices vary depending on the series of the PLC z Do not use the undefined blank special auxiliary relays and special data registers in the sequence program since they are occupied by the CPU a In addition do not activate or write to the devices with brackets on the first letter such as M 8000 or D 8001 in the program 1 3 For detailed explanation refer to the Programming Manual lt lt Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 cs Correspond Correspond 1 4 Number and name Operation and function ing special Number and name Operation and function ing special device device D PLC status Flag z a a M 8000 M 8020 ON when the result of addition o gt RUN monitor mt M Zero subtraction is 0 2 2 Inpu NO contact p M 8021 ON when the result of subtraction is i iad M 8001 se ie Borrow less than the min negative number 1 5 RUN monitor ror _ s M 8022 ON when carry occurs as a result NC contact S Cary of addition or when an overflow Se M 8002 M8000 occurs as a result of shift operation o T 2 NO contact m8001 __ _ aan BMOV instruction FNC 15 2 j l direction specification 5 M 8003 we M 8025 to M 8027 Not used 1 6 Initial pulse M8003 M 8028 100 ms 10 ms timer changeover NC contact OZ H lt 1 scan time eee ON when operation such as DSW i 7 eee ON when
235. tal load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value For details on the common terminal for each model refer to the Section 4 7 Item Output form Resistance load e 1 output point common terminal 0 5 A or less e 4 output points common terminal 0 8 A or less Max load 12 W 24 V DC The total of inductive loads per common terminal should be the following value Pee ee For details on the common terminal for each model refer to the Section 4 7 e 1 output point common terminal 12 W or less 24 V DC e 4 output points common terminal 19 2 W or less 24 V DC Open circuit leakage current 0 1 mA or less 30 V DC ON voltage 1 5 V or less OFF gt ON Y000 Y001 5 us or less 10 mA or more 5 to 24 V DC Response time ON OFF Y002 to YO15 0 2 ms or less 200 mA or more at 24 V DC Output circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation Output operation display LED on panel lights when photocoupler is driven Sink output wiring Source output wiring Output circuit configuration A common number applies to the LU of A common number applies to the U of COMI Fey UT 32 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 5 Performance Specifications 4 5 Performance Specifications I The performance specifications for the main unit are explained below o Item Performance Operation contro
236. tentionally in the program oS Reexamine the program Duplicate coil or RST instructions ao e When the output does not operate Check the configuration of the connected devices If the configuration of the external wiring and connected devices are acceptable the output circuit may be damaged Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative 2 Output does not turn off Stop the PLC and check that the output turns off Check for trouble with external wiring O E e 4 nN SE Oo O Q e When the output turns off The output may be turned on unintentionally in the program Check that there are no duplicate coils in the program _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ JOO e When the output does not turn off The output circuit may be damaged Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative s uoisue 14 7 2 24V DC input does not operate p sseg KJOW N 1 Input does not turn on Disconnect the external wiring and connect the S S terminal and the OV terminal or the 24V terminal Short circuit the OV terminal or 24V terminal not connected to the S S terminal and the input terminal then check the input display LED or a peripheral device to confirm that the input turns on Action Check that the input device does not have a built in diode or parallel resistance When input turns on If so refer to Subsection 9 2 2 Measure the voltage between the OV terminal or 24V termina
237. th of production Model name abbreviation DIN rail mounting hooks MITSUBISHI MELEG FXas 10 9 8 Mount the expansion board and memory cassette under this cover The signal names for power supply input and output terminals are shown The covers can be opened for wiring Keep the covers closed while the PLC is running the unit power is on When an input terminal X000 or more is turned on the corresponding LED lights The peripheral device connector variable analog potentiometers analog inputs and RUN STOP switch are located under this cover The operation status of the PLC can be checked with the LEDs The LEDs turn off light and flash according to the following table For details on the operation status refer to Section 14 5 LED name Description POW ON while power is on the PLC RUN ON while the PLC is running ERK Red O Flashing when a program error occurs Lee Lights when a CPU error occurs When an output terminal YOOO or more is turned on the corresponding LED lights The year and month of production of the main unit is indicated For details on the year and month of production refer to Subsection 5 1 1 The model name of the main unit is indicated Check the nameplate on the right side for the model name The main unit can be installed on DIN46277 rail 35 mm 1 38 wide 20 FX3S Series Program
238. the FX3s PLC and the PLC selected as the alternative model Refer to the manual of the used programming software for the operations for and cautions on write during RUN Cautions on write during RUN Item Caution Program memories which can be written in Built in EEPROM and optional memory cassette whose write protect switch is set to RUN mode OFF Number of program steps which can be written 256 steps or less after edition addition deletion for circuit change in RUN mode including NOP immediately after circuit blocks except final circuit Circuit blocks in which labels P and are added deleted or changed in edited circuits Circuit blocks which cannot be written in RUN Circuit blocks in which 1 ms timers T63 to T131 are added in edited circuits mage Circuit blocks in which the following instructions are included in edited circuits e Instruction to output high speed counters C235 to C255 OUT instruction 1 Circuit blocks cannot be edited to insert a label as shown below when written during RUN Pointer for interrupt 1001 42 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability Item Caution Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instructions during execution If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block the PLC decelerates and stops pulse output
239. the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed without regard to the ON 2 OFF status of the device that is set as the operation condition 5 It is necessary to set to ON the target device or operation condition device once and then set it 5 n to OFF for executing the instruction for falling edge pulse a _ Instructions for rising edge pulse Circuit blocks which eS When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for rising edge pulse attention on operation after write the instruction for rising edge pulse is executed if a target device of the instruction for rising during RUN edge pulse or the operation condition device is ON Target instructions for rising edge pulse LDP ANDP ORP and pulse operation type applied instructions such as MOVP Contact ON OFF status Instruction for Instruction for while write during RUN is executed rising edge pulse falling edge pulse OFF Not executed Not executed ON Executed Not executed uoneinByuoy 6 Z 3 4 The PLS instruction is not executed Writing in RUN mode to circuit blocks including the following instructions results in the following operation e MEP instruction Conversion of operation result to leading edge pulse instruction When completing Write during RUN to a circuit including the MEP instruction the execution result of the MEP instruction turns ON conducting state if the operation result up to the MEP instruction is ON MEF instruc
240. ting and wiring debris do not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC s ventilation port when installation work is completed Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Connect the peripheral device cables securely to their designated connectors Loose connections may cause malfunctions Connect the memory cassette and expansion board securely to their designated connectors Loose connections may cause malfunctions Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause device failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices expansion boards special adapters and memory cassette Connect the memory cassette securely to the appropriate connector Loose connections may cause malfunctions Installing the cassette in a raised or tilted posture can also cause malfunctions GHEE S2fety Precautions ED Read these precautions before use WIRING PRECAUTIONS WARNING 7 Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock
241. tion Conversion of operation result to trailing edge pulse instruction When completing Write during RUN to a circuit including the MEF instruction the execution result of the MEF instruction turns OFF nonconducting state regardless of the operation result ON or OFF up to the MEF instruction When the operation result up to the MEF instruction is set to ON once and then set to OFF the execution result of the MEF instruction turns ON conducting state uo ejesu i oo Operation result up to MEP MEF instruction MEP instruction MEF instruction OFF OFF nonconducting OFF nonconducting ON ON conducting OFF nonconducting e When writing during RUN with GX Works2 the program is as follows When the number of program steps is reduced by deletion of contacts coils and applied instructions the program capacity becomes smaller by as many as the reduced number of steps e Errors cannot be detected in write during RUN even in a circuit which causes errors Errors are detected after the PLC is stopped once and then run again Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Others Bun induy CO p i uH s13 UN09 peeds 43 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 3 Use of Built in USB Programming Port 5 3 Use of Built in USB Programming Port Make sure to set the contents described in this section when executing circuit
242. to the PC board thereby causing nonconformities Make sure to affix the expansion board with tapping screws Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Loose connections may cause malfunctions When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure that cutting and wiring debris do not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC s ventilation port when installation work is completed Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Connect the peripheral device cables securely to their designated connectors Loose connections may cause malfunctions Connect the memory cassette and expansion board securely to their designated connectors Loose connections may cause malfunctions Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause device failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices expansion boards special adapters and memory cassette Connect the memory cassette securely to the appropriate connector Loose connections may cause malfunctions Installing the cassette in a raised or tilted posture can also cause malfunctions 50 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition uononpou WIRING PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply ext
243. tput aa Q pS ee For details on emergency stop operation refer to DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field _ Qi suodo pue sun XZ 194 O 1 The output circuit of this PLC does not have a built in fuse Provide a fuse suitable to each load to prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit board caused by output element fracture due to load short circuiting Example 1 output point common terminal 1 A to 2 A 4 output points common terminal 5 A to 10 A s uoisue 2 e represents vacant terminals p sseg KJOW N WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Do not wire the vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ saoinaq jeloeds sj pow penuljuoosiq 111 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type This section explains handling of transistor output external wiring precautions and example of external wiring For the transistor output specifications refer to Subsection 4 4 2 12 2 1 Transistor Output Sink and Source There is a product of a sink output and source output in the transistor output of the main units e Sink output common Output to make load current flow into the output Y terminal is called sink output e Sou
244. tput monitor i Meee BUSY READY Y001 Pulse output monitor i Mats BUSY READY Inverter communication function Isic M 8151 Inverter communication in execution D8151 ch1 M 8152 2 Inverter communication error ch1 D8152 x Inverter communication error latch M 8153 2 D8153 ch1 M18154 t0 M8150 1 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or RS instruction is OFF 2 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN Correspond ing special device Number and name Operation and function Advanced function M 8163 to M 8167 Not used M 8161 4 8 bit process mode M 8162 High speed parallel link mode SMOV instruction FNC 13 M 8168 HEX data handling function T Pulse catch TAA Notused N N Network M18180 to pMje182 Notused oo Data communication error eae Master station Data communication error eee Slave station No 1 Data communication error pence Slave station No 2 Data communication error ene Slave station No 3 Data communication error oo panes Slave station No 4 Beets Data communication error meres Slave station No 5 Data communication error ees Slave station No 6 Data communication error mene Slave station No 7 M 8191 Data communication in execution M 8192 to M 8199 3 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN 4 Applicable to RS instruction FNC 80 ASCI instruction FNC 82 HEX instruction FNC 83 and CCD instruction FN
245. ual Hardware Edition 15 1 Special Adapters 15 1 3 FX3uU 3A ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches e Installation e Accessories 5 10 rot a poles OG ac 2o co amp Ove gt O E 5 poles 15 1 4 FX3u 4AD PT W ADP MASS Weight Approx 0 1 kg 0 22 Ibs DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws Manual supplied with product e Terminal block European type External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches e Installation e Accessories v mounting hole pitch 15 1 5 FX3u 4AD PNK ADP e MASS Weight Approx 0 1 kg 0 22 Ibs DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws Manual supplied with product e Terminal block European type External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches e Installation e Accessories 98 3 86 mounting hole pitch MASS Weight Approx 0 1 kg 0 22 Ibs DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws Manual supplied with product e Terminal block European type 142 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 1 Special Adapters 15 1 6 FX3u 4AD TC ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout D e MASS Weight Approx 0 1 kg 0 22 Ibs 2 04 5 mounting holes
246. ual Signal ON OFF width 10 us 50 us Input terminal X000 X001 X002 to X005 Input interruption function The PLC can process interruption routines with higher priority using external signals whose minimum ON duration or OFF duration is 10 us X000 X001 or 50 us X002 to X005 The timer interruption function is also provided Refer to Chapter 9 and Programming Manual Pulse output function When output terminals in the transistor output type main unit are used pulses of up to 100 kHz can be output simultaneously to 2 axes Y000 and Y001 Using a number of instructions programming is simplified Refer to Positioning Control Edition Various positioning instructions Instruction Description DSZR Mechanical zero l return instruction with DOG search function Instruction to read the current value from ABS our servo amplifier with absolute position ABS detecting function DRVI Positioning relative positioning to specify the movement from the current position Positioning absolute positioning to DRVA specify the target position based on the current value 0 Instruction to change the pulse train output PLSV frequency Refer to Positioning Control Edition 18 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 2 Features and Part Names User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 1 Major Features 3 Communication and network functions 4 Analog functions 5 The expansion board and special adapter fo
247. ual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2013 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Outline Precautions This manual provides information for the use of the FX3s Series Programmable Controllers The manual has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel The definition of such a person or persons is as follows a Any engineer who is responsible for the planning design and construction of automatic equipment using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that role These engineers should be fully aware of all aspects of safety with regards to automated equipment b Any commissioning or service engineer must be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that job These engineers should also be trained in the use and maintenance of the completed product This includes being completely familiar with all associated
248. ue of 0 22 to 0 25 Nem cF Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Failure to do so may cause P equipment failures or malfunctions Ja e To directly terminate the end of a stranded single wire cable e Stranded wire solid wire a Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires cannot Sas protrude E ZA UREE Approx Sa Do not solder plate the end of the cable 5mm ae 0 19 z e To terminate cable end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve e Bar terminal with insulating sleeve 1 5 If the cable cover is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into the Insulation sleeve Contact area insulation sleeve For this reason select an appropriate cable while Crimp area referring to the external view E v lt Reference gt Manufacturer Model Caulking tool Al 0 25 6BU AWG24 y Phoenix Contact Co Ltd AI 0 34 6TQ AWG22 SRIMPEOSG 9 or CRIMPFOX 6T F 2 Al 0 5 6WH AWG20 suondo pue sun XZ 194 O s uoisue p sseg KJOW N 1 Old model name CRIMPFOX ZA 3 2 Old model name CRIMPFOX UD 6 3 Tool zZ For tightening the terminal use a commercially available small screwdriver The head S having a straight form that is not widened toward the end as shown right should be T Caution straight If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will notbe 0 4 mm 2 5mm able to be achieved To ac
249. uooys jqnosj soueu zuleN _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ JOO a s uoisue p sseg KJOW N 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ S8dIAeq eloads p gt sj pow penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC rror operation Contents of error Action code at error occurrence Circuit error M8066 D8066 6620 FOR NEXT instruction nesting level exceeded ivaldinstucions pogramed witn STLRET 000 pearen h qa cone eros Uk or hen the leno stops Me MORE AI E ponte ORE TONIRET between a pair of instructions is incorrect 6627 Operation No STL instruction Modify the instructions in the program mode so that their 6628 Invalid instruction is used in main program mutual relationship becomes correct interrupt pointer SRET or IRET 6629 No P or interrupt pointer 6630 No SRET or IRET instruction STL RET or MC MCR instructions in subroutine 6631 SRET programmed in invalid location 6632 FEND programmed in invalid location Operation error M8067 D8067 0000 oe No error e No jump destination pointer for CJ or CALL instruction e Label is undefined or out of PO to P255 due to indexing 6701 e Label P63 is executed in CALL instruction cannot be used This error occurs in the executio
250. up COM 1 SA COM Port Time Out Sec 5 Transmission Speed 115 2Kbps Network Communication Route CCIE Cont CCIE Field Ethernet CC Link NET 10 H System Image Alo DE TEL FXCPU Select USB CCIE Cont NET 10 H Accessing Host Station inno CCIE Field Ethernet CC Link 6 Z 3 uoneinByuoy 4 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 5 Select FXCPU via GOT direct coupled transparent mode PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT uoneleysu I PLC Module CC IE Field Ethernet Adapter OK Setup PLC Mode FXCPU Cancel via GOT direct coupled transparent mode O0 Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid va au emetj transparent mode Select FXCPU Select via GOT direct coupled transparent mode Bun induy CO p h 6 Click the OK button to finish the setting SJ9 UNOD peeds ubi1H 45 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 5 Cautions on using transparent port 2 port function of GOT F900 Series 5 5 Cautions on using transparent port 2 port function of GOT F900 Series When monitoring circuits device monitor etc in an FX3S PLC from GX Works2 using the transparent 2 port function in the GOT F900 Series make sure to execute the following setting 1 Double click
251. urge killer and spark killer etc parallel to the load Select the rated voltage of a surge absorber that is suitable for the load being used Refer to the PLC output table below for other specifications contact Surge Guide absorber Inductive load Item Static electricity capacity Approx 0 1 uF Resistance value Approx 100 to 200 Q Reference Manufacturer Model name Manufacturer Model name Okaya Electric Industries Co Ltd CR 10201 Rubycon Corporation 250MCRA104100M B0325 3 Interlock For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where a o hazardous condition could result if switched ON L simultaneously an external interlock should be provided for Interlock rotation a i Normal interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to the PLC Output TN nitor toalion right contact X reverse raS rotation Reverse PLC output rotation contact 4 in phase PLC output contacts should be used in an in phase manner 110 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type 12 1 4 Example of external wiring 100 to 240 V AC Breaker sy c z 5 gt 5 a Ca Main unit relay output Buin yndino Emergency stop h S a ee E 10 buum OO sesp SNOEN wh Ja az 358 5 e Power supply for load oS 2 connected to PLC ou
252. ut signal ON OFF duration Interrupt pointer Input AUIDEE Interruption on Interruption on Interrupt disable control ON or OFF duration of input signal leading edge trailing edge 10 us or more X001 1101 1100 M8051 X002 1201 1200 M8052 X003 1301 1300 M8053 50 us or more X004 1401 1400 M8054 X005 1501 1500 M8055 9 3 2 Cautions for input interruption 1 Non overlap of input numbers The input terminals X000 to X005 can be used for high speed counter input interruption pulse catch SPD instruction ZRN instruction DSZR instruction and general purpose inputs Take care not to overlap the input numbers 2 Cautions in wiring It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables for connection cables 81 UOI ONPO U NO SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 OO uononpou Np suoneoyioeds f Qi s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJS wasis CD uoneinByuoy uoneleysu i O0 Q ae 28 o 2 D oe O O Ge eet lt 8 ox Bui induy s19 UN0J peeds ubIH FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 3 Input Interruption lI0OL to 1500 9 3 3 Examples of external wiring It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables for connection cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side 1 Examples of input interruption 1000 or 1001 wiring using X000 When another input terminal is used wire it ac
253. utput 1 Supported in FX3s PLC Ver 1 10 or later 3 1 3 Connector conversion adapter Model name Description FX3S CNV ADP Special adapter connection conversion adapter 3 1 4 Special adapters D Model name Description FX3U 232ADP MB For RS 232C communication FX3U 485ADP MB For RS 485 communication FX3U ENET ADP For Ethernet communication FX3U 4AD ADP 4 ch voltage current input FX3U 4DA ADP 4 ch voltage current output FX3U 3A ADP 2 ch voltage current input 1 ch voltage current output FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 ch platinum resistance thermometer sensor input 50 to 250 C FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 ch platinum resistance thermometer sensor input 100 to 600 C FX3U 4AD PNK ADP_ 4 ch Pt1000 Ni1000 resistance thermometer sensor input FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 ch thermocouple K J type temperature sensor input 1 The FX3U ENET ADP Ver 1 20 or later is applicable to the FX3s PLC 3 1 5 Memory cassette E Model name Description 32k step EEPROM memory with transfer switch FAAEE ERGMA The FX3S Series PLC can hold 16 000 steps of memory but user program capacity is limited to 4 000 steps 25 uononpou N uT a D aa Z D oO 3o D v nD 2 ONpold uononpou suonesyoods Aa Qi s3919 jesayd d pue uolsSJ3A wasis uoneinByuoy uo ejesu i oo Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Bun induy CO p i uH s13 UN09 peeds FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 3 Int
254. value output contact operation and reset status of counters are backed up kept even if the power is turned off phase 2 count input These counters are 32 bit up count down count binary counters The operations of the output contact according to the current value are the same as those of the above mentioned 1 phase 1 count input high speed counters Examples of program 1 2 For C246 X011 e While X012 is on C246 increments the value when the m RST input terminal X000 switches from OFF to ON and decrements the value when the input terminal X001 X012 switches from OFF to ON C246 D2 D3 0248 a e The down count up count operations of C246 to C250 can a be monitored through the ON OFF operations of M8246 to The setting is D3 D2 M8250 Up counting Down counting input input ON Down counting OFF Up counting For C249 x011 a eens e While X012 is on C249 starts counting immediately when A SOE RST C249 the input terminal X006 turns on The up counting input eee eee aes terminal is X000 and the down counting input terminal is X012 X001 C249 K1234 29 e C249 can be reset on the sequence by X011 For C249 X002 is allocated as reset input When X002 turns on C249 Down counting External start is immediately reset l input input Up counting H External reset 4 e The down count up count operations of C246 to C250 can be monitored through the ON OFF operations of M8246 to M8250 Main unit ON Down counting
255. ware Edition 16 3 Installation 16 3 Installation 16 3 1 Be sure that the power is OFF when installing the memory cassette Installation when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is not used together Installation procedure Remove the top cover A in the right figure Raise the memory cassette detachment lever B in the right figure Install the memory cassette to the main unit The memory cassette D in the right figure can be fixed with provided M3 tapping screws C in the right figure to the main unit This work is not required when fixation is not necessary e Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem Caution Two types of M3 tapping screws are provided Use M3x8 shorter screws Do not use M316 longer screws because they may damage the main unit 152 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 3 Installation 16 3 2 Installation D when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is used together z gt 8 Installation procedure Attach the expansion board connector conversion adapter to the main unit For the attachment method refer to Chapter 7 z Caution Make sure to attach the expansion board connector conversion adapter before the memory cassette Tightening with tapping screws M3x8 is not necessary 1 3 i Remove the upper con
256. wer frequency magnetic field Requirement for Compliance with LVD directive The following products have shown compliance through direct testing of the identified standards below and design analysis through the creation of a technical construction file to the European Directive for Low Voltage 2006 95 EC when used as directed by the appropriate documentation Type Programmable Controller Open Type Equipment Models MELSEC FX3s series manufactured from March 1st 2013 from September 1st 2013 FX3S MR ES FX3S MT ES FX3S MT ESS Where indicates 10 14 20 30 FX3S MR DS Where x indicates 10 14 20 30 FX3S 30MR ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD Standard Remark EN61131 2 2007 Programmable controllers The equipment has been assessed as a component for fitting in a suitable Equipment requirements and tests enclosure which meets the requirements of EN61131 2 2007 10 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Standards Caution for compliance with EC Directive 1 Installation in Enclosure Programmable logic controllers are open type devices that must be installed and used within conductive control boxes Please use the FX3S Series programmable logic controllers while installed in conductive shielded control boxes Please secure the control box lid to the control box for conduction Installation within a control box greatly affects the safety of the syst
257. wer line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure 107 u c z 5 gt 5 D Co Bunny yndino 2A 10 buum OO s sSN SNOEN Ja Bunooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny S L _ Qi suondo pue sun XZ 1940 s uoisue p sseg KJOW N 0008d 0008W S17 UONONSU gJ S8dIAeq eloads gt sj pow penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition WIRING PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not supply power to the 24V terminal 24 V DC service power supply on the main unit Doing so may cause damage to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit with a wire 2 mm or thicker
258. when PLC switches from STOP to RUN Access restriction status Present Access restriction Present ing value value status Read change H 00 2 ne keyword is not 8 8 H 10 2 Write protection Pe y H419 Read write P p protection H429 All online operation protection alata A Accesses are restricted by the keyword setting status indicates areas used by the system 168 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 w Correspond Correspond Number and name Content of register ing special Number and name Content of register ing special device device z N N Network setting N N Network monitoring amp D18170 t0 8172 Dp D 8173 Station number D 8201 Current link scan time 1 2 D 8174 Total number of slave stations D 8202 Maximum link scan time 2 D 8175 Refresh range D 8203 Number of communication error at 5 D 8176 Station number setting master station D 8177 Total slave station number setting D 8204 Number of communication error at 5 slave station No 1 D 8178 Refresh range setting M8038 D179 Tas D 8205 Number of communication error at 1 3 slave station No 2 D8180 Comms time out setting D 8206 Number of communication error at ce Index register Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 D 8207 Number of communication error at D D 8182 Value of Z1 register Re AOO
259. y of the operation An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents e Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices at the same time i e from a programming tool and a GOT Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the PLC program STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION e Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the memory cassette If the memory cassette is attached or detached while the PLC s power is on the data in the memory may be destroyed or the memory cassette may be damaged e Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative e Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any connection cable Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions e Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices expansion boards special adapters and memory cassette DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Please contact a certified electronic waste disposal company for the environmentally safe recycling and disposal of your device TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE PRECAUTIONS CAUTIO N The PLC is a precision instrument During transportation avoid impacts larger than those specified in the general specifi

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

User's Guide RCX C-Link Series: Remote Camera  W 3500 Kit - Wagner SprayTech USA  GPSMAP® 8500 istruzioni d`installazione  SIMATIC IPC627D/827D - Services  Intenso 1.8" Viddy  平沼産業 50周年記念チラシ PDFファイルダウンロード  Samsung Galaxy Ace Instrukcja obsługi  CG-NSC2100GT 取扱説明書  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file